JP2021049113A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve attractiveness of performance in a game machine capable of executing the performance for changing display modes of a performance display area.SOLUTION: A VDP 1500 of a display control part 123 performs texture mapping for associating a performance image EG obtained by simulating a performance display area 27TM005A of an image display device 5 with a three-dimensional object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, deforms or moves the object OB after the texture mapping, and generates an image IM by drawing an image obtained by viewing the deformed or moved object OB from an eye point EY0 by perspective projection.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-26

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As shown in Patent Document 1, the effect display area of the image display device is composed of a first effect display area and a second effect display area, and a display area of the first effect display area and a display area of the second effect display area. A game machine whose ratio can be changed is proposed.

JP-A-2017-196126 (Fig. 23)

In a game machine capable of performing an effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the production in a game machine capable of performing the production of changing the display mode of the production display area.

The game machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM).
A three-dimensional object (object OB) is placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image when the three-dimensional object (object OB) is viewed from a specific viewpoint is perspectively projected. An image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) for generating an effect image (image IM) by drawing with the image is provided.
The image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) is
A predetermined image (effect image EG) imitating the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display device (image display device 5) and arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space). Performs a predetermined process (synthesis process) to associate with the created three-dimensional object (object OB).
An image when the three-dimensional object (object OB) subjected to the predetermined processing (synthesis processing) is changed (transformed or moved) and the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is displayed. Draw by perspective projection to generate a production image (image IM),
further,
An effect execution means (for example, a microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, and
A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data related to moving images, and
A second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data related to a character image, and
A moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) that controls the display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area, and
A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of a character image using the data in the second storage area is provided.
The data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image designated by the text image designation information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by the text display setting information). Contains data on multiple text image components
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to the moving image (see, for example, FIG. 16-7).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. In addition, appropriate display control becomes possible.

The game machine of means C2
Means C1 gaming machine
The predetermined image (effect image EG) includes updated update information (first effect information, second effect information), and is used as an effect image (image IM) without performing the predetermined process (composite process). It can be displayed on the image display device (image display device 5) and can be displayed.
The image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) is a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space) as the predetermined process (composite process). ), Texture mapping is performed based on the predetermined image (effect image EG), the three-dimensional object to which the texture mapping is performed is changed (transformed or moved), and the changed three-dimensional object (object). A gaming machine characterized in that an image when OB) is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is drawn by perspective projection to regenerate an effect image (image IM).
According to such a configuration, the processing load of the image generation means can be reduced.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
An advantageous state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is obtained.
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings, and
A specific effect control means (divided effect) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display. A gaming machine characterized by having a production control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the game machine that can be set to any one of the plurality of set values.

The game machine of means C4
Means C3 game machine
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a mode of advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and a notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to make different modes (number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image ("Great chance !!" and "Chance!"), And appearing during super reach. Characters to be (character B and character A)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means C5
A gaming machine of means C3 or means C4,
With the end of the specific effect, the specific effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) ends the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (divided effect). Even after the end, it is common with the effect information (images of ally character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific effect is completed, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the update of the display is continued. Can make people feel.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C5.
The suggestion effect is a first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) in which the proportion of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols) is displayed differently depending on the set value. Including
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) is limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C6.
The suggestion effect includes a second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is “6”).
The suggestion effect control means (the effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) corresponding to the second display is restricted.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C8
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C7.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
An operation promotion display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) that prompts an operation, and
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of setting an operation promotion mode (blinking mode) for prompting the operation.
The operation promotion display means (effect control CPU 120) includes an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed.
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not use the operation unit as the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the division effect is executed. In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C8.
A mode of the push button 31B, which is capable of operating when the specific effect is not executed and does not operate when the specific effect is executed (in the case of a variable pattern not accompanied by a split effect). It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the push button 31B, but in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect, it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the mode of the push button 31B).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The gaming machine of means C10
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C9.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
A related information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect is provided.
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed.
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, a pseudo-ream. Corresponding to the execution of the effect [Y: Strong], the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means C11
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C10.
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying a parallax image (three-dimensional image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and a display body provided in front of the display body, the player's left eye. It is provided with an image display means (CPU 120 for effect control) having a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the right eye and preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the left eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means C12
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C11.
Corresponding display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display), and
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display is provided.
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display.
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the hold display and the active display are changed. I try not to let you
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C13
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C12.
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a first advance notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the advance notice effect, and a second one having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first advance notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice production (two pseudo continuous productions),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the second display (second effect image with a short display period). The first production image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher rate of displaying production information with a high expectation of big hits than the 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player has the expectation that the second notice effect is executed as the first display, and the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of means C14
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C13.
A variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern) is provided.
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to the variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing of ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set at any one of a plurality of end timings (TA1 timing and TA2 timing as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the effect data from being excessively increased.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and it corresponds to the setting value before and after the setting change. A game machine that displays a character image has been proposed. For a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values, as described in JP-A-2010-201002 (FIG. 12), when an effect of suggesting the setting is executed. In addition, it is preferable that the player feels the interest. The inventions relating to the means A1 to the means A12 and the inventions relating to the means B1 to the means B12 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the game can be set to any one of a plurality of set values. The purpose is to improve the interest of the production related to the machine.

The game machine of means A1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
An advantageous state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is obtained.
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings, and
A specific effect control means (divided effect) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display. With a CPU 120) for effect control,
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a pseudo that suggests a display result of the change display determined in the advance notice effect (change start time effect determination process) corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100). It is possible to execute the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach as the image in the movie) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) and the continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach). Yes,
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display (in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on which the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed, the variation pattern is supported. The specified movie will be played, and the setting suggestion effect will not be executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by limiting the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the suggestion effect and improve the interest of the suggestion effect. ..

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a mode of advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and a notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to make different modes (number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image ("Great chance !!" and "Chance!"), And appearing during super reach. Characters to be (character B and character A)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
With the end of the specific effect, the specific effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) ends the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (divided effect). Even after the end, it is common with the effect information (images of ally character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific effect is completed, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the update of the display is continued. Can make people feel.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
The suggestion effect is a first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) in which the proportion of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols) is displayed differently depending on the set value. Including
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) is limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The suggestion effect includes a second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is “6”).
The suggestion effect control means (the effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) corresponding to the second display is restricted.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
An operation promotion display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) that prompts an operation, and
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of setting an operation promotion mode (blinking mode) for prompting the operation.
The operation promotion display means (effect control CPU 120) includes an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed.
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not use the operation unit as the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the division effect is executed. In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
A mode of the push button 31B, which is capable of operating when the specific effect is not executed and does not operate when the specific effect is executed (in the case of a variable pattern not accompanied by a split effect). It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the push button 31B, but in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect, it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the mode of the push button 31B).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
A related information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect is provided.
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed.
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, a pseudo-ream. Corresponding to the execution of the effect [Y: Strong], the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8.
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying a parallax image (three-dimensional image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and a display body provided in front of the display body, the player's left eye. It is provided with an image display means (CPU 120 for effect control) having a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the right eye and preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the left eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A10
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9.
Corresponding display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display), and
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display is provided.
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display.
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the hold display and the active display are changed. I try not to let you
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A11
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10.
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a first advance notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the advance notice effect, and a second one having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first advance notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice production (two pseudo continuous productions),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the second display (second effect image with a short display period). The first production image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher rate of displaying production information with a high expectation of big hits than the 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player has the expectation that the second notice effect is executed as the first display, and the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of a specific production.

The game machine of means A12
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A11.
A variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern) is provided.
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to the variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing of ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set at any one of a plurality of end timings (TA1 timing and TA2 timing as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the effect data from being excessively increased.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
An advantageous state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is obtained.
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting a setting, and
A specific effect control means (divided effect) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display. With a CPU 120) for effect control,
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a pseudo that suggests a display result of the change display determined in the advance notice effect (change start time effect determination process) corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100). Continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach), the second display (second production image 27TM200), and notice production corresponding to the second display (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach as images in the movie) ) Is feasible,
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can make the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first display different from the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display (first effect image 27TM100). The execution rate (40%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to is higher than the execution rate (20%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a mode of advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and a notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to make different modes (number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image ("Great chance !!" and "Chance!"), And appearing during super reach. Characters to be (character B and character A)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
With the end of the specific effect, the specific effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) ends the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (divided effect). Even after the end, it is common with the effect information (images of ally character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific effect is completed, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the update of the display is continued. Can make people feel.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
The suggestion effect is a first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) in which the proportion of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols) is displayed differently depending on the set value. Including
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) is limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The suggestion effect includes a second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is “6”).
The suggestion effect control means (the effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) corresponding to the second display is restricted.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
An operation promotion display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) that prompts an operation, and
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of setting an operation promotion mode (blinking mode) for prompting the operation.
The operation promotion display means (effect control CPU 120) includes an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed.
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not use the operation unit as the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the division effect is executed. In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
A mode of the push button 31B, which is capable of operating when the specific effect is not executed and does not operate when the specific effect is executed (in the case of a variable pattern not accompanied by a split effect). It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the push button 31B, but in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect, it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the mode of the push button 31B).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
A related information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect is provided.
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed.
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, a pseudo-ream. Corresponding to the execution of the effect [Y: Strong], the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B9
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying a parallax image (three-dimensional image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and a display body provided in front of the display body, the player's left eye. It is provided with an image display means (CPU 120 for effect control) having a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the right eye and preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the left eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The gaming machine of means B10
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9.
Corresponding display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display), and
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display is provided.
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display.
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the hold display and the active display are changed. I try not to let you
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B11
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10.
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a first advance notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the advance notice effect, and a second one having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first advance notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice production (two pseudo continuous productions),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the second display (second effect image with a short display period). The first production image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher rate of displaying production information with a high expectation of big hits than the 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player has the expectation that the second notice effect is executed as the first display, and the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of means B12
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11.
A variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern) is provided.
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to the variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing of ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set at any one of a plurality of end timings (TA1 timing and TA2 timing as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the effect data from being excessively increased.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the following inventions relating to the gaming machine of means C15 to means C22. Conventionally, there has been a technique in a game machine that enables character information of character lines to be displayed in different modes during execution of a super reach effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77592. In such a game machine, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or the recognition of the character image becomes difficult. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of appropriately controlling the display.

The game machine of means C15
A game machine capable of executing a game (for example, pachinko game machine 1), and capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added. An effect executing means (for example, an effect control microprocessor 91AK100), a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image (for example, a storage area 91AKM11), and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image (for example, a storage area). 91AKM13, etc.), a moving image control means that controls the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.), and data in the second storage area. A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of a character image is provided, and the data in the second storage area is designated by a first component (for example, text image designation information). The character image control means includes data on a plurality of character image components including a text image and the like and a second component (for example, a display style set by the text display setting information), and the character image control means is used for one moving image. The first component and the second component can be changed during the display period of the added character image (see, for example, FIG. 16-7).
With such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The game machine of means C16
The gaming machine according to means C15, the character image control means changes a second component related to the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component in the display period. It may be possible (see, eg, FIG. 16-8).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The gaming machine of means C17
The gaming machine according to means C15 or C16, wherein the character image control means relates to the character image by using information common to a specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting a color field). The second component may be modifiable (see, eg, FIG. 16-6).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The game machine of means C18
A gaming machine according to any one of means C15 to C17, wherein the character image control means produces a specific character image (for example, a text image indicating "super hot") corresponding to a specific first component group. It can be displayed, and the second component related to the specific character image may be changed at a plurality of timings (see, for example, FIG. 16-8).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The game machine of means C19
The game machine according to any one of the means C15 to the means C18, even if the character image control means can individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. Good (see, for example, Figure 16-4).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The gaming machine of the means C20 is the gaming machine described in any one of the means C15 to the means C19, and the data in the second storage area is outline data (for example, outline font data) that can be used for displaying a character image. It may be included.
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The gaming machine of the means C21 is the gaming machine described in any one of the means C15 to the means C20, and when a specific element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "gold"), the gloss is applied. A character image having a character may be displayed, and an effect image may be added around the character image and displayed (see, for example, FIG. 16-8).
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

The gaming machine of the means C22 is the gaming machine described in any of the means C15 to the means C21, and is predetermined when a special element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"). Character images in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed (for example, changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, reddish purple, etc.) in a range (for example, in-character coordinates or display time range) It may be displayable.
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the display appropriately.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each display information displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect determination process which is executed at the time of a start winning a prize. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of the active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process which is executed at the start of fluctuation. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, and (H1) and (H2) are expected degree notices used when executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the effect is executed, and (I1) and (I2) are for deciding whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table of, (J) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the effect mode of the 2nd change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table of the expectation degree advance notice effect used when executing the first setting suggestion effect, and (L) is used when not executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the establishment combination determination table of the expectation degree notice effect, and (M) is the explanatory diagram which shows the table for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is executed. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini reel information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production information in the division production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the division effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a start winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning a movie A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning a movie B. It is a time chart which shows the playback end timing of each movie. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning the pseudo-continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start in 1st Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution / non-execution determination table of the third setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution / non-execution determination table of the fourth setting suggestion effect, and (C) is a cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence / absence determination table of. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode related to the third setting suggestion effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode related to the fourth setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the cut-in notice production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence or absence determination table of the 5th setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 5th setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the display control part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drawing method of 3D image processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the composition processing of a production image and an object. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change which rotates an object after a synthesis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space. It is a screen view which shows the display mode of the image projected on the virtual screen and the background image. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation effect determination processing which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the presence / absence and the number of times of operation effect which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the setting suggestion number of times which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the setting suggestion pattern which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the setting suggestion pattern which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the value notification number of times which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various productions concerning a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the operation effect which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the operation effect which concerns on a feature part 60AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". .. In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, movement of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probabilistic symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By executing the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the first special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. (Details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the second special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. To. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to send the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "missing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process of waiting for passage through the first gate in step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is “4”. In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot opening preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “5”. In this first big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state, etc. It is included. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process during opening of the first jackpot in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “6”. In this first big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are used. , It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Then, the processing during the opening of the first jackpot is completed.

The first jackpot release post-processing in step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “7”. In this first big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings for ending the game state. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the first special figure Figure The value of the process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the first jackpot ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “8”. The first jackpot end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a process of waiting until the end of the jackpot game state is completed. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting probabilistic change control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot end process ends.

The first small hit release preprocessing in step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “9”. This first small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit release preprocessing ends.

The process during opening of the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “10”. In this first small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. It includes processing to determine whether or not it has become. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the process during the opening of the first small hit is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “11”. The first small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hit end process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the first small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 8-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various prize information related to winning is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, and is used as a game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and at least RAM is built in. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the same are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 8-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 8-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), and FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, 6 numbers of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and 6 levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is in the open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 has performed a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing in steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to be in a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a security signal is set to a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is the timing when 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or is controlled to the setting change mode by executing the initialization process. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error for which the game is stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unclear whether or not an error has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to this mode and is the first after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is used as it is as an image. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 are restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it suffices to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that the value has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds, which corresponds to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one round (taking the random number for normal symbol hit judgment). When the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to this form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the disconnection occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the fact that there is no such operation, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 8-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. The state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change can be appropriately determined.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned ON when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined to be big hits differs depending on the set value. For example, an event in which the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of starting prize before the setting change is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of order in relation to the setting value after the change. On the contrary, although it is determined to be out of order in relation to the set value before the change, an event may occur in which it is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process process is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the hold memory (hold memory of special symbol, hold memory of normal symbol) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of hold memory is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interrupt permission of step S21TM1540 being not performed, the switch processing (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed. , Starting prizes, passing through gates, etc. are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the random numbers have not been updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning prize during the period controlled by the setting change mode, the same random number value will be obtained regardless of the start winning timing, and the game will be played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start prize and gate passage are invalidated.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described with reference to -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the game hall ends the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and 8-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 8-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It will be a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set value (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the control state related to the setting to the outside of the game machine.

The game machine of means O1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
It is a game machine of means O1
An initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150) is provided.
The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is completed and the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). In step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102, which stores the setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the game machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The game machine of means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied). ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
It is a game machine of means P1
The setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (at the time of turning on the power, all in steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The game machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
It is a game machine of means Q1
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the game machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.) can be executed.
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.) can be executed.
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

[Explanation of feature 16TM]
Next, the feature unit 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1) are explanatory views showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display in the present embodiment. The hold display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed, and the active display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed. In the present embodiment, a first hold display area 16TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (1st hold display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image display device An active display area 16TM013 is provided at the lower center of the screen of No. 5 where the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini effect area 16TM035, which will be described later, is located in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini slot 16TM030 as if it were the pedestal of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily grasp that the mini-slot 16TM030 executes the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the mini slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and regardless of the number of reserved storages. Information.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011, the first hold display 16TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the area at the upper center of the image display device 5 on which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed. The symbol display area 5R is used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, and the special symbol is variablely displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not the symbol is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variablely displayed and stopped, is displayed from the left in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area. Let it be 5r. The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, when the image is controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini slot is set in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5. 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), the mini-slots of "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "7", and "blank" The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), the symbols without the warning characters (“not displayed”) and the jackpot expectation are displayed. The mini-slot symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", which are symbols consisting of suggestive notice characters, are variably displayed.

(Variable display of the first mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol, variation of the small symbol). Each time the display) is executed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three areas, "left", "middle", and "right". ), The first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) can be executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" simply means a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol, or a variable display of a small symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each mini-slot symbol display area of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "replay", "bell", "watermelon", A plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other, such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)", are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, if the combinations of symbols called the winning combinations are aligned, the winning combination is established as if the winning combination was established. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The winning combination in this embodiment is a combination of the same symbol and a combination including different symbols. In the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "off".

In the present embodiment, the winning combination is established when the combinations of the same symbols are aligned. For example, when the same symbol combinations of [bell], [bell], and [bell] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the role of "bell" is established. Similarly, if the same combination of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is available, the role of "watermelon" is established, and if the same combination of [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] is available, "cherry". The role of "cherry" is established, and when the combinations of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] are complete, the role of "7 match" is established. However, when the same combinations of [blank], [blank], and [blank] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the same treatment is performed as when the winning combination is "missing".

(Variable display of the second mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-mentioned successful combinations is established), the two are not divided into a plurality. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display). is there. In the second mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), "no display", "CHANGE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" can be distinguished from each other. A plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, the display result by the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the displayed characters (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed). Is suggested to be a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), the number of fluctuation displays executed after the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state) is counted. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the fluctuation number counter is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variation display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variation displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), "125" is displayed as the variation number display 16TM040, and the variation display has already been executed 124 times since the gaming state shifts to the normal state. It shows the state in which the 125th fluctuation display is being executed at the present time.

Here, the variation number display 16TM040 is different from the normal mode (for example, the white mode) by executing the second setting suggestion effect described later based on the set value of the game machine. For example, it changes to purple mode).

It should be noted that the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is expected to be different from the normal mode (for example, white mode), the normal mode, and the above-mentioned setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the variation display to be executed. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expected degree notice effect) that changes to a degree notice mode (for example, a red mode) may be executed. However, in the same variation display, both the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is displayed. Expectation level notice The production shall not be executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation notice effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning change effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2 in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. , And whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine if it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display and the final display mode determination table of the active display described later (FIG. 9-3 (A)). It is determined based on (see step S16TM1010). The final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In the present embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, the warning characters may be superimposed and displayed on the active display according to the execution of the expectation warning effect described later. That is, there is a possibility that the mode of the active display may change from the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of winning the start, based on the effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003, any one of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is used. It is possible to determine, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 70% and the blue mode (blue) at a rate of 25%. (Round display), and the red mode (red round display) at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 10%, a blue mode at a rate of 30%, and a red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, the execution presence / absence of the first change effect, and the number of executions based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 001 to the change pattern 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) has a probability of 70% change pattern 001. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 002 is selected and the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 001 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 60%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when a start winning prize occurs, but the display mode of the active display at the time of active shift is different from the final display mode. Will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a first change effect that suggests that it may change. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed. Further, the first change effect is an effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character Acts on the active display, but does not change the display mode of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and in each case, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 30% of the change pattern 011. Selected with probability, change pattern 012 is selected with 27% probability, change pattern 013 is selected with 23% probability, change pattern 014 is selected with 10% probability, change pattern 015 is selected with 5% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 013 is two, and in each case, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 015 is two, and after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and after the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 35% of the change pattern 021. The change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is 0. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the successful mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 024 is two, and after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 025 is two, and after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the first change effect of the success mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 9-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and performs the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 9-4 (C) shows a change pattern of the hold display for one hold when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “1”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 101 to the change pattern 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory). Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 102 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 103 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9-4, the active shift means that the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, the determination target at the time of starting winning is obtained. The active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

In this embodiment, when the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013, the display mode is not changed. That is, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift match.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is not changed at the time of active shift, but the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is changed at the time of active shift. You may let me.

FIG. 9-4 (D) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for two holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “2”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 201 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 40% of the change pattern 202. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 10% of the change pattern 204. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 has a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

FIG. 9-4 (E) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for three holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “3”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 301 to the change pattern 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "off"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 301. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 302. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 has a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 13% of the change pattern 305. The change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 305 is selected with a 20% probability, the change pattern 306 is selected with a 20% probability, and the change pattern 307 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4 (F) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for four holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “4”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 401. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 402. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. .. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a 30% probability, the change pattern 403 is selected with a 30% probability, and the change pattern 404 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 3% of the change pattern 406. The change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. Selected, change pattern 411 is selected with a 10% probability, change pattern 412 is selected with a 15% probability, change pattern 413 is selected with a 15% probability, and change pattern 414 is selected with a 15% probability. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. The change pattern 409 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 410 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 411 is selected with a 15% probability, and the change pattern 412 is selected with a 7% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the change pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command that specifies the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the fluctuation time and effect contents of the special symbol (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 9-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-6 (G)) (step S16TM2000). ..

Here, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this first setting suggestion effect, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination. By doing so, it is a production that makes the role of "Bell" established. That is, based on the fact that the combination of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. It is recognized that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting the above has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6 (G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 3%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 4%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 5%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 6%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 7%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of execution of the first setting suggestion effect. Become. In the present embodiment, since the effect determination process at the start of the variation is executed each time the variation display is executed, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is set to [bell] or "off". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, and the first relative to the number of times the variable display is executed. You will also be interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player guess the set value for each variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of execution of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table 1 (see FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120 described later.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (fluctuation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 60%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 40%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 80%. To do.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and 9-6 (H2), whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed is determined based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time). In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). If it is (seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation notice effect is given. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%.

When a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect There is not enough time to perform the production of. Therefore, when the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is executed, although the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, the expectation notice effect is not executed after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect. There is.

On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (super reach off (120 seconds), super reach jackpot (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect are produced. There is enough time to do it. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the fluctuation time. When the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation time is long. In any case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common ratio. On the other hand, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate when the fluctuation time is long than when the fluctuation time is short. That is, when the variation time of the variation display to be executed is shorter than [the ratio of the expectation notice effect to be executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed] [The rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect changes the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on "a character symbol as a display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production to make you. In the present embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display becomes the display result of "no display" in which the character symbol is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

FIG. 9-6 (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the character symbol is a mini slot as the display result of the second mini slot variable display. It is possible to determine either "no display", which is a display result that is not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1, or "CHANGE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER", which are character symbols, and each of these displays. Judgment values are assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the display result of the fluctuation display is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing"), the fluctuation is concerned. As the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be executed in the display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "extreme heat" is selected at a rate of 5%. Is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the fluctuation display is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable to be executed in the fluctuation display is variable. As the display result of the display, "No display" is selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 35%, "Intense heat" is selected at a rate of 40%, and "Intense heat" is selected at a rate of 3%. "FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of a big hit is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on one reel), "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER" The expectation that it will be a big hit is high in this order. Therefore, when any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character symbols is displayed without stopping. The rate of big hits is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). Further, since the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the character symbol to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In the present embodiment, when the character symbol (any of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER") is stopped as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. The second change effect is executed. Specifically, when any of the character symbols "CHANGE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel) of the mini slot 16TM030, (i) The stopped-displayed character symbol moves upward from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 9-10 (11)), (ii). The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon indicating the same character as the character symbol that is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character symbol as the display result is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination when executing the first setting suggestion effect in the expectation degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7 (K)). (Step S16TM2050), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 1 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the advance notice production (same below), It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

In the present embodiment, when "out of place" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 are stopped and displayed with a combination of mini-slot symbols including different symbols. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expected degree advance notice effect is established. It becomes "off".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is a mini with the same symbol combination. Stop and display the slot symbol. For example, when the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is stopped and displayed as the combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expected degree notice effect is established. Becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After stopping and displaying the combination of [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] mini-slot symbols as a combination, the mini-slot symbols are re-variated in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. Areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 can be combined with [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] mini-slot symbols, or [cherry], [cherry], [cherry] mini-slot symbols as a combination of the same symbols. Stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "cherry (freeze)" or "7-match (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the normal mode (freeze) is set in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbol in a freeze mode different from the scroll display or update display from top to bottom), [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. ], Or the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is stopped and displayed. The variable display of the freeze mode in the present embodiment is a mini-slot symbol that executes scroll display or update display from the bottom to the top while the visibility of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is reduced. It is a variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHANGE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 45%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. 20% will be "cherry", 2% will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% will be "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 40%. It becomes "cherry", 10% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 25% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 70% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the winning combination is "off", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( When the character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat" and the winning combination is "7 sets", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". In addition, when the winning combination is "off", "no display" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol than "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "super heat". "CHANGE" is easier to select than "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "cherry", "super heat" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than "CHANGE".

That is, with respect to the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER", and the first Regarding the winning combination of the mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state is higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 matching". In addition, when "7-match" is selected as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display, the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display is always "FEVER", so "7-match" is confirmed as a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state can be different depending on the winning combination composed of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination with the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 sets (freeze)". Then, when "cherry (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat", and when "7 matching (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination. The notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbol performs variable display in the freeze mode, the winning combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 sets") is determined, so that the mini-slot symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode. The expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled is higher than when it is performed. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table 2 (see FIGS. 9-6 (I1) and (I2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 20%. .. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (fluctuation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 60%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30%, and executes it at a rate of 70%. Decide on that. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 90%. To do.

Here, in the examples of FIGS. 9 (H1) and 9 (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, the expectation notice effect is not executed. In the examples of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2), which were determined (“no execution” is 100%) but determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” fluctuation pattern was selected. In some cases, it may be decided to execute the expectation notice effect ("execution" is 20% for "normal reach off" and 70% for "normal reach jackpot").

Further, in the example of FIGS. 9 (H1) and 9 (H2) determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect when the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is selected ("" In the example of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2), it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, rather than 40% for "super reach out" and 80% for "super reach jackpot". When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect is higher (60% for "super reach out" and 90% for "super reach jackpot"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. ..

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed in the expectation degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 2 (see FIG. 9-7 (L)). (Step S16TM2150), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 2 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the advance notice production (same below), It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHANGE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. Then, 2% becomes "cherry", 18% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 10% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 10%. It becomes "cherry", 38% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 27% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 30% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

In the present embodiment, there are cases where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and cases where it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. An example is shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than the "bell") is determined based on different tables, but it is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "bell") in the expectation notice effect is common between the case where the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It may be decided based on the table of. That is, while step S16TM2020 and step S16TM2120 determine whether or not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect at different ratios (based on the execution presence / absence determination table of the different expectation degree advance notice effect), the step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2150 have a common winning combination. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect may be determined based on the determination table.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state (normal state), the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is the first each time the variation display is executed. The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the winning combination is "bell" or "missing". Then, after the end of the first mini-slot variable display (first time), (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation notice effect is executed). (Case) and (ii) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (the expectation notice effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree notice effect is executed), the established combination determined based on the established combination determination table is established. Later, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is further executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not include a character ("not displayed") or (b) a character symbol ("CHANGE", "super heat"". , "FEVER") stops. (B) When the character symbol ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") is stopped, the second change effect in which the character icon based on the character symbol is added to the active display is executed. Become.

As described above, in the above embodiment, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped, that is, the second. Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect is always "missing". .. Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed). In addition, in (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that, there is a possibility that a winning combination other than "off" is established.

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol (“no display”) that does not include a character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed), (I) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system). The second mini-slot variable display (first time) may be executed.

Further, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) the character symbol (“CHANGE”, “super heat”, “FEVER”) may be stopped without fail. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is executed, the second change effect may be executed after that. When such an effect configuration is adopted, the winning combination of (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is "missing". It may not be.

Next, when the value of the fluctuation count counter is 25 × n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table (see FIG. 9-7 (M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 25 × n (n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this second setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is an effect that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the variation number display 16TM040 displayed in purple on the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal mode. Return to.

In FIG. 9-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set set values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and decides to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88%, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 12%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 14%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84%, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 16%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 18%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the low probability low base state, the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed. However, the image display device 5 is not limited to such a mode, and the image display device 5 is mini-sized when the gaming state is any of a low-accuracy high-base state, a high-accuracy high-base state, and a high-accuracy low-base state. Slot 16TM030 may be displayed and any of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the expectation degree advance notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation number display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the second setting suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the low probability low base state. Regardless of the form, when the gaming state is any of the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the image display device 5 displays the variation number display 16TM040, and the second The setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120, and further, in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. The role of establishing the expectation notice production has been decided. When the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on the currently set setting value. In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

Further, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation level advance notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) Based on the above, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation notice production. If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is non-reach out of reach (10 seconds), normal reach out of reach (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is decided that "expectation notice effect is not executed" at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of the super reach (120 seconds), it is decided to "execute the expectation notice effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of the super reach jackpot (120 seconds). Determines to "execute the expectation notice production" at a rate of 80%.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). , [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. After displaying the combination stop display of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols on 5R1, the same other than [bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. It is possible to stop and display a combination of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.). According to such a configuration, in the mini slot 16TM030, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the expectation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the display result becomes a "big hit" can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), each time the first setting suggestion effect having a different execution ratio is executed according to the set value, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. , The player himself calculates the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect [execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect = (number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed / number of fluctuations) × 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can infer the set value by determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the effect execution ratio is close to.

Temporarily, a configuration was adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the expectation degree notice effect is performed before the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion effect. In that case, due to the relationship between the decision to execute the expectation notice effect and the fluctuation time, the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, or the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect is won. Even so, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed because the expectation notice effect is prioritized. As a result, the degree of deviation between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual set value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the set value is reduced, and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in step S16TM2000 and step S16TM2020 of FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined before whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the expectation notice effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, with respect to specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree notice effect, FIGS. 9-8 to 9 This will be described using -10. 9-8 are time charts when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed, and FIGS. 9-9 and 9 -10 shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree advance notice effect are executed. It is explanatory drawing.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, when the CPU 103 wins a start, the display result of the variation display corresponding to the start prize is a "big hit" in the first start prize determination process (S101A). This is an example of the case where it is determined (when specified by the symbol specification command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to the red mode in step S16TM1010 in the start winning change effect determination process, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example in the case where the pattern is decided to be the change pattern 022 and the first change effect of the success mode is decided to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a "big hit" at the start of the fluctuation (specified by the display result specification command), and sets the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display to the "super reach jackpot". This is an example of the case where "(120 seconds)" is determined (when specified by the fluctuation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 in the change start effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, and executes the expectation notice effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it was decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to "extreme heat" and to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the expectation notice effect was produced. This is an example in which it is decided that the winning combination of is "cherry (freeze)", and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state, the display of the variation display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed). Based on the result being "off", the effect control CPU 120 when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "247") is continuously displayed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l and the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 In 5c and the small symbol display area 5r, the combination of small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 displays four first hold displays 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 in response to the number of first hold storages being 4.

In the low-accuracy low-base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) in the image display device 5 The fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is set to "124" or the like. The screen when the character of is displayed in the normal mode (white mode) is shown.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini slot symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing", and the mini of the image display device 5 In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([replay], [replay], and [bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-8), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and corresponds to the case where the first reserved storage number is 3. Then, three first hold display 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and steps. Based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is "125" or the like. The case where the character of is displayed in purple mode is shown. The player grasps that the setting suggestion is made by changing the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 from the conventional normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T2 shown in −8), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, the minislot in the minislot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (variable display of the first mini slot) is started. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T3 shown in −8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the variation number display 16TM040 (characters such as “125”) displayed in the purple mode is returned to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, the variation display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini slot symbols are variable in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T4 shown in −8), success based on the decision in step S16TM1020 to set the change pattern of the active display to the change pattern 022 and to execute the first change effect of the success mode. The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, the character 16TM050 appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 corresponds to the active display 16TM003, the player can be expected to change the mode of the active display 16TM003.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the mini slot symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T5 shown in −8), the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round shape) in response to the execution of the first change effect of the successful mode. Display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of mini-slot symbols when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T6 shown in -8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was "cherry (freeze)", the expectation notice effect was executed and the image display device In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of 5, variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the freeze mode is started. In this example, when the variable display of the freeze mode is executed, the dark image 16TM100 is displayed as a covering image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbol and visually recognizing it. In a difficult state, the variable display (scroll display or update display) of the mini slot symbol is executed from the bottom to the top. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the visibility of the mini slot symbol, the dark image 16TM100 covering the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is displayed, so that the mini has a lower display priority than the dark image 16TM100. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%), but it is not limited to such a form and is more than the darkened image 16TM100. A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and can be seen behind the darkened image 16TM100 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). %).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T7 shown in -8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was "cherry (freeze)", the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 In 5, C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] in this example) when the winning combination is "cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T8 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display when the reach state is established. .. That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the 3-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the 1-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. One reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 can display any one of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols ("no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") as a display result. If the result is a symbol containing a notice character ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER"), the icon of the notice character that is the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. The second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 that the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "extreme heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation notice effect is decided to be "super heat", the design including the notice character of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (Timing of T9 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second change effect (stop and display the symbol including the warning character) in step S16TM2040. Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The effect of moving to the active display area 16TM013 and acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the effect image is displayed. It suggests to the player that the mode of the active display 16TM003 changes. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), the battle effect is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the ally character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays a character icon based on the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the character icon of "super heat") that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character (“super heat” in this example) that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 The combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" ([cherry], [cherry], [cherry] in this example) is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-9 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbol is displayed. The mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) as a warning character for the expectation notice effect is stopped and displayed in area 5LCR1 (Fig. 9-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The second change effect of adding a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed mini-slot pattern character (“super heat” in this example) to the active display 16TM003 is being executed (FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the two-change effect can be executed, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is terminated before the battle effect executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is started. I am trying to do it. That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is executed in the first half of the variation display (before the reach state is established), that is, in the stage before the display result of the variation display is suggested. It is possible to raise interest in suggestive production. In addition, the latter half of the fluctuation display (after the reach state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the fluctuation display is suggested (after the battle effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is started). Then, since the first setting suggestion effect has already been completed, it is possible to pay attention to the display result (result of the battle effect) of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the determination that the first setting suggestion effect is not executed and the expectation notice effect is not executed. In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "out of place" (in this example, [replay], [replay], and [bell]) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 is established. The combination of mini-slot symbols whose role is "bell" ([bell] [bell] [bell] in this example) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect and the winning combination is determined to be "cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" (in this example, [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry]) stops. In this way, since it is possible to stop and display any one of a plurality of types of winning combinations in the mini slot 16TM030, the variable display of the minislot symbol is executed in the minislot 16TM030 for the game. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), the number of fluctuations is displayed in the lower left area of the image display device 5 which is different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5). A second setting suggestion effect is performed in which the 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect ranges from 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas the figure shows. As shown in 9-7 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect ranges from 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), so that both effects are executed the same number of times. Assuming that this is done, the second setting suggestion effect makes it easier to guess the set value than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6). Therefore, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the game machine. Further, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6), and the former is selected. The set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is estimated as the set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is larger than the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect. It is highly possible that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery is performed for each variation display for the first setting suggestion effect, and the execution lottery is performed for each 25 variation display for the second setting suggestion effect. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display number of times (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the set value. .. As described above, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the ratio of the set values suggested by the effects to the set values of the game machine is different, the interest of the setting suggestion effects can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), and the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. 2 Setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variation display of the small symbol is executed as the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, whereas in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect, second). By executing the setting suggestion effect), the visibility of one of the effects does not deteriorate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a plurality of types of display modes (normal mode, blue mode, and red mode) ( Display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 is accompanied by the appearance of the character 16TM050 and the execution of the action effect of the mode of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003. The first change effect of changing the color) from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) is executed. Further, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of the fluctuation, and the character icon indicated by the character symbol is displayed based on the character symbol that is the display result. The second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in the area different from the area where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the area where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( A second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the action effect based on the notice character displayed in the special effect area 16TM035). Can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and 9-10, a mini-slot symbol stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 when the second change effect is executed (in this example, "super heat") However, the effect of jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hitting the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 is executed. Specifically, after the effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003 is displayed, the mini-slot symbol display area A character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and 9-7 (L), the winning combination of the expectation notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "missing" and "watermelon". , "Cherry", and "7 sets". Then, depending on the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of whether the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" is selected. It's different. Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol and the mode of the character symbol are determined. It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, which mode of the character icon is added to the active display 16TM003 is determined according to the winning combination of the expectation level advance notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. The proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of the total result of the winning combination)
In the present embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, and the low accuracy low base state (normal state). ), And a menu screen including a "mini reel information" icon for confirming the number of times the variation is displayed (the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed) and the number of times each winning combination is won in the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, each icon of "volume adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", and "mini reel information" can be selected.

FIG. 9-11 is displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the mini reel information.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11, the characters "mini reel information" are displayed in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, the cumulative number of fluctuation displays (variation display of special symbols) executed in the low accuracy low base state (normal state) and the number of winnings of each winning combination in the mini slot 16TM030 are displayed. The mini reel information 16TM200 including the above, the selecting tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and the next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210. Further, at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters “return”.

In the mini reel information 16TM200, the character "rotation speed" is displayed at the top as an item indicating the number of fluctuation display times, and in response to this, the cumulative total of fluctuation display executed in the low probability low base state (normal state). The number of times "XXXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "bell" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination bell, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the first mini-slot variable display "AAAA". "Times" and "Bell" winning probability "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the third row, the character "watermelon" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of watermelons, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "watermelon" in the first mini-slot variable display "BBBB". "Times" and "Watermelon" winning probability "(1 / bbbb.b)" [= Cumulative number of times "Watermelon" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 4th row, the character "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination cherry, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "cherry" in the first mini-slot variable display "CCCC". "Times" and "Cherry" winning probability "(1 / cccc.c)" [= Cumulative number of times "Cherry" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 5th row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating 7 sets of winning combinations, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times that the winning combination is "7 sets" in the first mini-slot variable display. "DDDD times" and the winning probability of "7 sets" "(1 / ddddd.d)" [= Cumulative number of times when "7 sets" are established / Low probability Low base state (normal state) Cumulative number] is displayed.

The cumulative number of times "7 sets" has been won (DDDD times) is a combination of mini slot symbols that are "7 sets" in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini slot 16TM030 (in this example). , [7] [7] [7]) indicate the number of times the game has stopped, and is counted separately from the number of times the jackpot has occurred and displayed as an item different from the number of times the jackpot has occurred.

In addition, each cumulative number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed in a maximum of 4 digits, and the count is stopped at "9999 times". In addition, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1 / 99999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of winnings is 1 or more, the winning probability is displayed, and if the number of winnings is 0, the winning probability display is hidden.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores the history information (each cumulative number of times described above, etc.) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 images the mini reel information based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5. Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before the previous day" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

As the mini reel information, the mini reel information of "today" is set as the default, and the characters "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210 and the characters "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting the operator to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The characters are switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched from "two days before" to "today". Then, when the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the mini reel information of "the day before the previous day" is selected, the information is switched to the mini reel information of "today" again, and the characters on the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. Is switched to "today", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched to "previous day".

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on and the date of the current power-on are different, the history information of the "previous day" is changed to ". After storing in the storage area corresponding to "the day before the previous day" (overwriting the history information), the history information of "today" is stored in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting of the history information), and the data is updated. .. As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business of "today", the "previous day" and "previous day" are based on the updated "previous day" and "previous day" historical information stored in the backup storage area. It is possible to display the mini reel information of "every day".

Further, in the present embodiment, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the characters “return”. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM280 is displayed, the display of the mini reel information ends and the screen returns to the menu screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, "today" and "today" are backed up. The mini reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, in the mini reel information 16TM200, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and the winning probability of "bell", "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= cumulative number of times "bell" is established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable displays executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is performed. The set value can be estimated by determining which of the set values of the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution rate is close to. However, when the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed may be erroneously counted. In the present embodiment, the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the demo display to confirm the execution probability (the winning probability of the "bell") of the first setting suggestion effect in the mini reel information. Therefore, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is erroneously counted, the accurate execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects suggesting the currently set value, but the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect (well-known execution rate) corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is the set value. It is difficult for the player to estimate the actual set value when it is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2. However, in such a situation, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini reel information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well known). The player can infer that it is highly likely that the set value has been changed at least when it is close to the execution rate of. That is, it can be inferred that the set values of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" are the set values 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set values have been changed for "today", the current set values. Can be inferred to be at least a set value of 2 or more.

The setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at different ratios depending on whether or not the set value is changed on the day. For example, when the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at different ratios depending on the set value. For example, the effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while the set value is 3 or more. The display color of the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets". An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot of a specific jackpot type may be different depending on the winning combination. For example, the degree of expectation that the jackpot type will be a probabilistic jackpot differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation may be higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets".

(3) In the above embodiment, an example of executing the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "off" based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. Although shown, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) execute the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "out of place". In some cases, (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be executed.

When such an effect configuration is adopted and (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (a) When it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation notice effect is executed, and a winning combination other than "bell" (including "missing") is used as the winning combination. After the establishment, the second mini-slot variable display related to the expected degree notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it was decided not to execute (b) the expectation notice effect when (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed. Occasionally, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display is executed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example is shown in which the image display device 5 is displayed and the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mini reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demo display. For example, during the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the variable display period, the mini reel information can be obtained by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 and the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified. It should be noted that the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation, for example, an advantage for the player such as an ending period of the big hit game state and a variable display at which the high base state ends. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the end of the above period.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mini reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mini reel information is displayed in an area different from that of the image display device 5. Is also good. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a sub-image display device that displays various effects images different from the image display device 5, mini reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during a demo display, a jackpot game state, or a variable display. You may.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display, but the second change effect is not limited to such a form, and the second change effect is a hold display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, the display result (character symbol) of the second mini-slot variable display is used to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that has not been executed, and the second A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. As described above, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that has been executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that has not been executed. In addition, the target of the response information changed by the second change effect is not limited to the response information corresponding to the executed variation display (active display), but also the response information corresponding to the non-executed variation display (hold display). It may be.

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "bell" or "missing". ", The second successful combination is other than" bell ") has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be executed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed. The first mini-slot variable display related to the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation advance notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, the first winning combination is set to "missing" and then the second winning combination is set to "bell" (first setting suggestion effect), the third time. It is possible to set the 4th winning combination to "cherry" after setting the winning combination to "watermelon".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display of 2 mini slots may be executed twice or more. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is set to "CHANGE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be set to "extreme heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that the display result with a high expectation is not followed by the display result with a low expectation. The fall of the notice character shall be restricted.

Further, the second change effect may be executed a plurality of times in response to the execution of the second mini-slot variable display a plurality of times. For example, based on the fact that the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANGE", the character icon of "CHANGE" is superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is displayed. Is changed to "super heat", and instead of the character icon of "CHANGE", the character icon of "super heat" may be superimposed on the active display. In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so that the display mode with high expectation does not change to the display mode with low expectation, and the active display is displayed. It shall limit the decline of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode is exemplified as the special mode of the variable display of the mini-slot symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of special modes may be provided. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the freeze mode described above, a mode in which the speed at which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (scrolling speed) is extremely faster or extremely slower than the normal mode may be provided, and the variable display may be provided. A mode in which the mini-slot symbol to be played is enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode) may be provided. Further, the ratio of the winning combination may be different depending on the type of the special aspect. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (mode in which the mini slot symbol is enlarged), the winning combination of the variable display of the mini slot symbol is "cherry" or "7 sets". The ratio may be high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol, a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, the winning combination may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of the winning combinations to be "cherry" or "7 sets" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. May be high.

(11) In the above embodiment, at the timing when the combination of the mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (the winning combination is established), the mini-slot symbol corresponds to the winning combination. The effect image may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "replay" is established as a winning combination, a blue effect image is displayed, when "bell" is established as a winning combination, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "watermelon" is established as a winning combination. , If a green effect image is displayed and "cherry" is established as a winning combination, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 alignment" is established as a winning combination, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. Good.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 are stopped and displayed as a winning combination for notifying that a big hit has been confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR alignment" may be stopped and displayed as a winning combination to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. To stop and display the "BAR alignment" as a winning combination is to stop and display the combination of [BAR], [BAR], and [BAR] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. Further, the probability variation jackpot may be determined when "7 alignment" is established, and the normal jackpot may be determined when "BAR alignment" is established.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbol does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed). Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved storages has been shown, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period, not limited to such a form. For example, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period when the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) is not established multiple times except for "off" during one special symbol variation display. Not limited to such a form, the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) that is not “out of place” may be established multiple times during one variation display of the special symbol. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if the total number of times that the winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the cumulative number of times, [How many fluctuation displays out of the executed n fluctuation displays] It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information for guessing the set value, such as whether the winning combination [bell] is established in response to the above, and the importance of the information displayed in the mini reel information 16TM200 becomes important. It may drop and the player may not pay attention. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established multiple times during one special symbol variation display, the same winning combination is displayed during this variation display. The cumulative number of times is counted, assuming that the number of times it has been established is one. For example, even if the winning combination of "bell" is established three times during one special symbol variation display, the number of times the winning combination of "bell" is established during this variation display is regarded as one, and the mini reel Information 16 Add 1 to the cumulative number of times the TM200 "bell" has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value is shown, but it is specific. With respect to the set value of (for example, a set value such as 5 or 6 which is particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from the case of other set values. For example, when the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. As for whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, the lottery is performed once every 25 times as described above, whereas as to whether or not to use the second setting suggestion mode, 50 A separate lottery may be held once a time. Then, when it is decided to use the second setting suggestion mode, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed as the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode) regardless of whether or not it is decided to use the first setting suggestion mode. ).

(16) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the low probability low base state (normal state). Not limited to this, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). For example, the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time is larger than the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time. , The first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed at the lower center of the screen and the set value is suggested by the display result, but the mini-slot is not limited to such a mode. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the symbol. For example, an effect in which any one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the appearing character.

Note that the variable display of the mini-slot symbol and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed in an area different from the lower center of the screen. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effect acting on the hold display and the effect acting on the active display are the lower center (see FIG. 9-10 (11)) or the lower right (FIG. 9-9 (5)) of the screen. Although examples are shown in (see), these effects may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect by the variable display of the mini slot symbol are executed in the low probability low base state (normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed in a high-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy low-base state (KT control in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect (the rate at which the winning combination is "bell") is [(a variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the gaming state in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed). The ratio of (the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed in the game state (the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol) to the number of times)]. If the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed in, [(the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high-accuracy high-base state) ÷ (high-accuracy high-base) The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated by the variable display number of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the state), and the set value is suggested by the calculated value. In addition, the high accuracy and low base state (KT state). ) When the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed, [(the number of times that the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high accuracy low base state (KT state)) ÷ (Number of variations of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the high-accuracy low-base state (KT state))] calculates the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect, and the calculated value suggests the set value.

In the above [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], an example of the configuration relating to the following means A1 to means A10 and an example of the configuration relating to the following means B1 to means B10 are shown.

Here, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and the setting values before and after the setting change can be set. A game machine that displays a character image according to the above has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the interest of the production. The configuration according to the means A1 to the means A10 shown below and the configuration according to the means B1 to the means B10 shown below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and any one of a plurality of set values is set. The purpose is to improve the interest of the production related to the game machine that can be set to the value.

The gaming machine of means A1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") corresponding to a setting suggestion relating to the setting means, and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling the advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol).
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). It is possible to stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the special display can be displayed and then the specific display can be displayed. (When the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds) or super reach jackpot (120 seconds), the winning combination is "bell" after the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed. Stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols that are "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and stop and display the "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol. It is possible).
According to such a configuration, since the special display can be displayed with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1
It is equipped with a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) that controls the production.
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. Whether or not to perform is determined (whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined for each variation display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the first setting is made according to the set value. The execution rate of the suggestion effect is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can infer the set value when the variable display is executed.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
It is equipped with a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) that controls the production.
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after making the determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that it is possible to perform appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized.

The game machine of means A4
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3.
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) displays the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed. It is characterized by being hidden.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A5
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). (Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means A6
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode, the winning combination is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is determined, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means A7
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means A8
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying the mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The game machine of means A9
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 9-6). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

The game machine of means A10
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute the variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first decorative identification information in the first area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the center of the screen). , Variable display of the second decoration identification information (variable display of small symbols), which is less visible than the first decoration identification information, can be executed in the second area (small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r at the upper right of the screen). Yes,
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display at least one of the special display or the specific display in the first area (mini slot symbols in the mini reel symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 at the lower center of the screen). The combination is displayed), and the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area is restricted (the mini-slot symbol is not displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the second decorative identification information in the second region from being lowered.

The gaming machine of means B1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion related to the setting means (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling an advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol) in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) capable of displaying the corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display, and
The specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" is provided in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After the stop display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the mode of the corresponding display is changed in response to the stop display of the character symbol of "super heat" in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1). Change effect to be made (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), a second change effect is added to the active display 16TM030 with a character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern (“super heat”)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the above.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion can perform a change effect in response to the specific display being displayed in a specific area. Can be improved.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
There are a plurality of types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as the mode of the corresponding display (active display).
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine capable of executing a special effect (first change effect) that changes the special aspect of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to change the corresponding display of the special aspect.

The game machine of means B3
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (FIG. 9-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat”) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon indicating the same characters as the characters (“super heat”) of the mini-slot symbol stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of change production.

The game machine of means B4
A game machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3.
There are a plurality of types of the specific display (the first mini-slot variable display has "off", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the second mini-slot variable display has "7 sets" as the display result. There are "No display", "CHANGE", "Intense heat", "FEVER"),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the mode of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at a different ratio (as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the first in the expectation notice effect. The winning combination of the 1 mini-slot variable display is determined to be "out of place", "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and the second mini-slot depends on which winning combination is determined. The selection ratio of whether the display result of the variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER" is different, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 depending on which combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect is determined. The ratio of the mode of the character icon is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the type of the specific display and the mode of the corresponding display related to each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

The game machine of means B5
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
It is equipped with a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) that controls the production.
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after making the determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that it is possible to perform appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized.

The game machine of means B6
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). (Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means B7
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode, the winning combination is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is determined, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means B8
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means B9
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying the mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The gaming machine of means B10
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 9-6). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

[Explanation of feature 27TM]
Next, the feature unit 27TM will be described. The gaming machine shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], that is, the gaming machine whose set value can be changed may include the feature unit 27TM shown below.

Specifically, in the gaming machine provided with the feature unit 27TM, the effect image (the effect image corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol) displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol is reduced. A divided effect is executed in which the left portion of the effect display area and the right portion of the effect display area are divided and displayed in the above manner (see FIG. 10-1). By this division effect, the game gives the impression that the variable display of a plurality of special symbols (or the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to each of the variable display of the plurality of special symbols) is being executed in parallel at the same time. Can be given to a person. In this [Explanation of the feature unit 27TM], the description of the same configuration as that shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM] will be omitted.

(Screen configuration when executing split production)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect information displayed on the screen when the division effect is executed in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the area where the effect information can be displayed on the image display device 5 (the area of the entire screen) is defined as the effect display area 27TM005A.

The first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are provided in the upper left portion of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of the first small symbol is executed. In addition, a second small symbol display area is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the effect display area 27TM005A, and in this second small symbol display area, the variation of the second small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is provided. The display shall be executed.

That is, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, variable display of the first small symbol (a sub-effect symbol that is smaller than the main effect symbol and has low visibility) is executed. Further, as the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second small symbol display area. Then, the variation display of the second small symbol (the symbol for the sub-effect that is smaller than the symbol for the main effect and has low visibility) is executed.

At the bottom of the effect display area 27TM005A, a first hold display area 27TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (1st hold display 27TM010 of 0 to 4) and an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display are displayed. An active display area 27TM031 and a second hold display area 27TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (2nd hold display 27TM020 of 0 to 4) are provided. With the active display area 27TM031 in the center, the left side is the first hold display area 27TM011 and the right side is the second hold display area 27TM021 when viewed from the player.

Further, in the vicinity of the left end portion of the effect display area 27TM005A and in the central portion in the vertical direction, a first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number numerically is provided, and in the vicinity of the right end portion of the effect display area 27TM005A. A second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number numerically is provided in the central portion in the vertical direction. Since the number of objects corresponding to the first hold storage number (first hold display 27TM010) is displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011, the number of objects is larger than the first hold storage number displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011. 1 Hold storage number The first hold storage number displayed in the special display area 27TM015 is less noticeable and less visible. Further, since the number of objects corresponding to the second hold storage number (second hold display 27TM020) is displayed in the second hold display area 27TM021, the number of objects displayed in the second hold display area 27TM021 is larger than the second hold storage number displayed. However, the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 is less noticeable and less visible.

In the split effect, the combination of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) to be displayed in a variable manner and the frame surrounding the decorative symbol is increased from one set to two sets, and one of them is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. The other is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 including the first decorative symbol (first main effect symbol) are displayed. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 including the second decorative symbol (second main effect symbol) are displayed.

In this way, the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the second effect displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. The second effect information including the image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are both effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first effect information and the second effect information correspond to the variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the common special symbol). Will be displayed in parallel at the same time.

Here, as for the first effect information (effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A), the variable display of the special symbol is started. Correspondingly, the effect information corresponding to the variation pattern specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 continues even after the division effect is completed during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. The effect information (for example, the first decorative pattern) that can be displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A is included.

On the other hand, the second effect information (effect information including the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A) also corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol. The effect information corresponds to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120, but unlike the first effect information, the effect is divided during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. This is the effect information that is not displayed (controlled to be hidden) when is completed.

Further, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are images displayed side by side for a predetermined period (within a period during which the split effect is executed), and one of them is different from the other within the predetermined period. It may be an aspect. Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect image 27TM100 is an image of the advance notice effect (for example, a cut-in image of the cut-in advance notice effect described later) that suggests the display result of the variation display determined in the effect determination process at the start of the change. ) May be superimposed.

On the other hand, the second production image 27TM200 is used as a movie (in this example, movie A (short / long) and movie B (short / long), which will be described later) for a predetermined period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. It is an image based on. Therefore, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the advance notice effect image suggesting the display result of the change display determined in the change start effect determination process is not superimposed and displayed, but the advance notice is made as an image in the movie. An image of the effect (for example, a cut-in image described later) may be displayed.

When the divided effect is executed, (1) the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed on the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. When one pattern of effect control is executed, contrary to (1), (2) a second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. The effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed may be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, (1) the effect control of the first pattern is executed in the divided effect.

In the present embodiment, in the determination by the CPU 103 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, the determination at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), (1) the right part of the screen becomes the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the left part of the screen. Is determined to execute the effect control of the first pattern that becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the right side of the screen. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed on the left side of the screen (see FIG. 10-1).

Further, in the determination by the CPU 103 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, the determination at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), (2) the right part of the screen becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and the left part of the screen becomes the first. Based on the decision to execute the effect control of the second pattern that becomes the effect image display area 27TM100A, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the left side of the screen, and the right part of the screen. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 will be displayed.

When the effect control of the first pattern is executed in the split effect, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (in the case of FIG. 10-1). The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced from those before the split effect are the left side of the rectangle (the side on the center side of the screen) rather than the right side of the rectangle (the side on the right side of the screen). ) Is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between the two is narrowed from the right edge (right side of the screen) to the left edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110, the left end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

Further, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced from those before the split effect are on the right side (center side of the screen) of the rectangle rather than the left side (left side of the screen) of the rectangle. The upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the left edge (left side of the screen) to the right edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210, the right end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

On the other hand, when the effect control of the second pattern is executed in the split effect, the second effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the first effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (FIG. 10-1). In the opposite case), the first effect image 27TM100 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced compared to before the split effect, and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are on the right side of the rectangle (the left side of the screen) rather than the left side of the rectangle (the left side of the screen). The side on the center side of the screen) is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between the two is narrowed from the left edge (left side of the screen) to the right edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110, the right end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

Further, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced from those before the split effect are on the left side (center side of the screen) of the rectangle rather than the right side (right side of the screen) of the rectangle. The upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the right edge (right side of the screen) to the left edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210, the left end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

(First Embodiment)
As shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. is there. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value. In the first embodiment described below, as an example in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed during the division effect, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. It is characterized in that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in.

(Specific example of split production)
A specific mode of the division effect will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the division effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command accompanied by the split effect has an effect image corresponding to the variation pattern specification command accompanied by the split effect and various effects determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation. The effect image is displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A during the variation display period of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (1), before the execution of the division effect, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decoration identification information is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative design (main production design) is displayed in a variable manner. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Before executing the split effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a single background image in the effect display area 27TM005A, and displays a left decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L on the left side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A. A middle decoration symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5C at the center of the effect display area 27TM005A, and a right decoration symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5R on the right side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A.

The display mode of the background image and the decorative pattern before the division effect is that a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, right decorative pattern) are superimposed on the rectangular background image at the same size and at equal intervals. It has become. That is, the background image and the decorative design are arranged parallel to the screen in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the background image and the decorative design are viewed from a viewpoint perpendicular to the screen (on the player side of the screen). It is an aspect.

Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has the first reserved storage number of 3, "3" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of two sets of background images and decorative patterns based on the background image and decorative pattern in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the divided effect is executed. Appear on region 27TM005A. The combination of one of them becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first effect image 27TM100 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A as the divided effect is executed, and produces the effect. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen. ing.

Then, in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variation display of the first decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second In the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. "0" is continuously displayed. Further, in the active display area 27TM031, the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is continuously displayed, and in the first hold display area 27TM011, three first hold displays 27TM010 are continuously displayed. It is displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the division effect is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image 27TM200A is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen. Even when 27TM200 is displayed, the positions of the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015, the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025, the active display area 27TM031, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 are divided. Without changing from each position before the start of the production, the first hold storage number "3", the second hold storage number "0", the active display 27TM030, and the first hold display 27TM010 are set at each position before the start of the split production. It is continuously displayed in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (3), when a predetermined period elapses after the division effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. In the enlarged display period in which the first effect image 27TM100 is gradually enlarged and displayed, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200, and the player It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen from the front. As described above, regarding the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period, the relationship of the second effect image 27TM200 <the first effect image 27TM100 is established. In the area where the effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 overlap, the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200.

After the first effect image 27TM100 is further enlarged and displayed from the state of FIG. 10-2 (3) to completely cover the second effect image 27TM200 (after the second effect image 27TM200 becomes completely invisible). Finally, at the timing when the rectangle of the first effect image 27TM100 (first effect image frame 27TM110) was enlarged and displayed until it overlapped with the rectangle of the effect display area 27TM005A (the state shown in FIG. 10-2 (4)). Sometimes) the split effect ends.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 (3) and (4), at the timing when the division effect ends, the first decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100 After the division effect is completed, it will be displayed as a decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display area 27TM005A.

As described above, the display period of the first effect information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A is longer than that of the second effect information. Further, the first effect information when the split effect ends and the effect information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A after the division effect ends share common effect information (for example, a combination of the same decorative symbols). Therefore, the continuity of the effect is guaranteed from the execution of the split effect to the end of the split effect.

Therefore, for the player, the first effect information in which the same effect information is continuously displayed even after the end of the divided effect is the true effect information, and is hidden when the divided effect ends. It can also be said that the second production information (movie associated with the fluctuation pattern in advance) is false production information. Further, the first effect information that becomes more visible when the divided effect ends is the true effect information, and the second effect information that becomes less visible when the divided effect ends (a variable pattern in advance). It can also be said that the movie associated with) is fake production information.

(Determination of fluctuation pattern)
As described above, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 is based on a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the display result (“missing” or “big hit”) of the variation display determined at the start of variation of the special symbol, and a random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the start winning. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is determined. Then, a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "out of place", and the variation display result is set to "big hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots, which is used when it is determined in advance, is prepared in advance.

(Variation pattern type)
As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the present embodiment, the types of variation patterns for loss are classified into "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "super reach A loss", and "super reach B loss". There is. Then, for each type of variation pattern, each corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), the number of executions of the pseudo-ream and the mode of the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream type). There is a variation pattern.

For the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern type, the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result is finally "out of reach" is fixedly stopped without the reach state being established after the variation display is started. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach off" is that after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established, the fluctuation display result is finally "off" without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. This is a type of fluctuation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the pattern is fixed and stopped.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach A Off" is whether or not a big hit is won by a battle between a friendly character and an enemy character A as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect A that informs the player is executed, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally "off" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach B Off" is whether or not a big hit is won by a battle between a friendly character and an enemy character B as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect B is executed to notify the player, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character B is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally "off" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the present embodiment, there are various types of jackpot fluctuation patterns, such as "normal reach jackpot", "super reach A jackpot", and "super reach B jackpot". Then, for each type of variation pattern, each corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), the number of executions of the pseudo-ream and the mode of the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream type). There is a variation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot" is that after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established, the fluctuation display result is finally "big hit" without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. This is a type of fluctuation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the pattern is fixed and stopped.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot" is whether or not the jackpot is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character A as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect A is executed to notify the player, the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character A is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally a "big hit" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot" is whether or not the jackpot is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect B is executed to notify the player, the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character B is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally a "big hit" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach A off” and “super reach B off”, and “super reach A jackpot” and “super reach B jackpot”), after the reach state is established, As a super reach effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a ally character and an enemy character have won a big hit by performing a battle. Then, when the final display result is "big hit" (when the big hit symbol is fixed and stopped), the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed, and when the final display result is "missing" (missing symbol). When is definitely stopped), the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

In the deviation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-3, the variation pattern type of "non-reach outlier", the variation pattern type of "normal reach outlier", the variation pattern type of "super reach A outlier", and "super reach B". Judgment values for determining the fluctuation pattern whose display result is "missing" are assigned to each fluctuation pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type of "missing".

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots shown in FIG. 10-4, each variation of the fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach A jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach B jackpot". Judgment values for determining the fluctuation pattern for which the display result is a "big hit" are assigned to each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pattern type.

(Pseudo-ren)
In the present embodiment, for each variation pattern, whether or not the pseudo-ream is executed and the number of executions when the pseudo-ream is executed are set. When the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-ream is determined one or more times, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command for specifying the variation pattern displays the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern on the image display device 5. The pseudo-ream will be executed one or more times during the period.

Pseudo-ream is a decoration in each display area of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol within the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the time when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped and the display result is derived and displayed. This is an effect in which the design is temporarily stopped and then changed and displayed again. By executing the pseudo-ream, it is as if the variation display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variation display period of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern specification command of 1 corresponding to the hold storage of 1. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed multiple times.

In the pseudo-ream shown in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol consisting of numbers is temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol, and then the display area of the middle symbol is composed of the characters "NEXT". After the pseudo-continuous symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols 27TM300 shown in FIGS. 10-9 (A2) and (B2) described later) are temporarily stopped, the decorative symbols in the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol display areas are temporarily stopped. The fluctuation display of is resumed (so-called re-variation is performed). Here, the "state in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative symbol does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is swinging. The decorative symbol may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced, or the decorative symbol may be in a different form (deformed) from the final stop (when the symbol is confirmed).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, as a type of pseudo-ream, there are a pseudo-ream of type X having a low expectation of being a big hit and a pseudo-ream of type Y having a high expectation of being a big hit.

(Outside fluctuation pattern)
As a variation pattern type of "non-reach off", there is only a variation pattern of "non-reach out [no division effect, no pseudo-ream]" in which the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed.

When the display result is "off", the variation pattern of "non-reach off [no division effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 60%.

As the fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach loss", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed, and the degree of expectation is high. There is a variation pattern of "normal reach loss [no division effect, one pseudo-ream (type X)]" in which a pseudo-ream of low type X is executed once.

If the display result is "off", the variation pattern of "normal reach off [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "normal reach is off [no split effect, pseudo-ream once" ( The fluctuation pattern of "Type X)]" is selected at a rate of 5.5%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A Off", the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A Off [No division effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the division effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A off [No split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the division effect is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A off [No split effect, Pseudo-ream 2 times (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low is executed twice, and the type with high expectation because the split-effect is not executed There is a variation pattern of "super reach A off [no division effect, pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of Y is executed twice.

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 3.5%, and "super reach A off [no split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 3%, and“ Super Reach A off [no division effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)] ”variation pattern is 2.5 It is selected at a rate of%, and the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A off [No division effect, pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 2%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A off", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of "1st pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" that is out of reach A.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A off", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach A off [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)].

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off [first pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)]" is 1.5%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A off [1st pattern division production (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "Super Reach A" is selected. The variation pattern of "missing [second pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach A loss [second pattern division effect] is selected. (Movie A (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B Off", the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B-out [No division effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the division effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B off [No split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the split-effect is not executed The variation pattern of "Super Reach B off [No split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (Type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type Y with a high value is executed once, and the type in which the split effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is low The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B off [No split effect, Pseudo-ream 2 times (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of X is executed twice, and the pseudo-ream of type Y with high expectation because the split effect is not executed. There is a variation pattern of "super reach B off [no division effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" in which the ream is executed twice.

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B off [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and "super reach B off [no split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 2%, and“ Super Reach B off [no division effect, pseudo-ream 1 time (type Y)] ”variation pattern is 1.5 The variation pattern of "Super Reach B is out [No split effect, Pseudo-ream 2 times (Type X)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "Super Reach B is out [No split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B off", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of "1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" that is out of reach B.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B off", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B off [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)].

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B off [first pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 1%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B off [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "Super Reach B" is selected. The variation pattern of "missing [second pattern splitting effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "super reach B missed [second pattern splitting effect (movie)" is selected. B (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 0.5%.

(Big hit fluctuation pattern)
As the fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed, and the expectation level is high. There is a variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, one pseudo-ream (type X)]" in which a pseudo-ream of low type X is executed once.

When the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 1]" is selected. Time (type X)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the split effect is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low is executed twice, and the type with high expectation because the split effect is not executed There is a variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of Y is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach A big hit [no split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)] "variation pattern is selected at a rate of 2%, and" Super Reach A jackpot [no division effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)] "variation pattern is 2.5 It is selected at a rate of%, and the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 5%.

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach A jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]].

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach A jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)].

If the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A big hit [1st pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 6%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "Super Reach A jackpot [" The variation pattern of "2nd pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 6%, and "Super Reach A jackpot [2nd pattern division effect (movie A (movie A (movie A))" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the split-effect is not executed The variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type Y with a high value is executed once, and the type with low expectation because the split-effect is not executed. The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of X is executed twice, and the pseudo-ream of type Y, which is highly expected because the split effect is not executed. There is a variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" in which the ream is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B big hit [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 2%, and "super reach B big hit [no split effect, pseudo-ream]" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "1 time in a row (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, 1 time in a pseudo series (type Y)]" is 3%. Selected by percentage, the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, and "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2]" is selected. Time (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]].

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]].

If the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B big hit [1st pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 10%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%, and "Super Reach B jackpot [" The variation pattern of "2nd pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 10%, and "Super Reach B jackpot [2nd pattern division effect (movie B (movie B (movie B))" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off" is The selected ratio is [3.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1 = 16%], and the selected ratio of the “super reach B out of order” variation pattern is [2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0. 5 = 11.5%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the fluctuation of the "super reach A big hit" The rate at which the pattern is selected is [1.5 + 2 + 2.5 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7 = 37%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot" is selected is [2 + 2.5 + 3 + 3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12 = 61.5%].

In this way, the rate at which the display result is "big hit" is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B" is selected than when the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A" is selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the "division effect" is performed in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach. The ratio of "No execution" selected is the ratio of [Super Reach A (no division effect execution) + Super Reach B (no division effect execution)], so [(3.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2) + ( 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1.5 + 1) = 19.5%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "with split effect execution" is selected in the variation pattern with super reach is [Super Reach A (with split effect execution). Since the ratio is [+ Super Reach B (with division effect execution)], it is [(1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 8%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach is "big hit". The rate at which the variation pattern of "no split effect execution" is selected is the ratio of [Super Reach A (no split effect execution) + Super Reach B (no split effect execution)], so [(1.5 + 2 + 2.5 + 5) + (2 + 2.5 + 3 + 3 + 7) = 28.5%], and the ratio of the variation pattern of "with split effect execution" selected in the variation pattern with super reach is [Super Reach A (with split effect execution) + super Since it is the ratio of reach B (with division effect execution)], it is [(6 + 7 + 6 + 7) + (10 + 12 + 10 + 12) = 70%].

In this way, the rate at which the display result is "big hit" is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "with split effect execution" is selected than when the variation pattern of "without split effect execution" is selected. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), "pseudo-repeated number 0 times (none)". The rate at which the fluctuation pattern of is selected is as follows: [Non-reach loss (pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)) + normal reach loss (pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)) + super reach A loss (pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)) )) + Super Reach B is off (pseudo-ream count 0 times (none))], so it is [60 + 7 + 3.5 + 2.5 = 73%], and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream count 1" is selected. Since the ratio is [normal reach loss (pseudo-ream number 1 time) + super reach A loss (pseudo-ream number 1 time) + super reach B loss (pseudo-ream number 1 time)], [5.5 + 3 + (pseudo-reach number 1) 2 + 1.5) = 12%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 2 times" is selected is [super reach A off (pseudo-ream number 2 times) + super reach B off (pseudo-ream number 2). Since it is the ratio of [times)], it is [(2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 15%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), "the number of pseudo-reams is 0 (none). The rate at which the variation pattern of ")" is selected is as follows: [Normal reach jackpot (pseudo-reach number 0 (none)) + Super reach A jackpot (pseudo-reach 0 (none)) + Super reach B jackpot (pseudo-reach 0) Since it is the ratio of [times (none))], it is [0.5 + 1.5 + 2 = 4%], and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 1" is [normal reach jackpot (pseudo-ream number 1). (Times) + Super Reach A jackpot (1 pseudo-ream) + Super Reach B jackpot (1 pseudo-ream)], so [1 + 2 + (2.5 + 3) = 8.5%] The rate at which the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 2 times" is selected is the ratio of [super reach A jackpot (pseudo-ream number 2 times) + super reach B jackpot (pseudo-ream number 2 times)], so [(2) .5 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7) + (3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12) = 87.5%].

In this way, the display result shows the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)", the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 1 time", and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream count 2 times". The ratio of "big hits" increases in the order of "pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)" <"pseudo-ream number 1 time" <"pseudo-ream number 2 times". Therefore, the player expects that many pseudo-reams are executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the pseudo-ream is executed, and the pseudo-ream is executed. The rate at which type X is selected as the type is [5.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 = 14.5%], and the rate at which the pseudo-ream is executed and the type Y is selected as the type of the pseudo-ream is [ 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5 = 12.5%].

As shown in Fig. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the pseudo-ream is executed, and the pseudo-ream is executed. The ratio of type X selected as the type is [1 + 2 + 2.5 + 2.5 + 3 = 11%], the pseudo-ream is executed, and the ratio of type Y selected as the type of the pseudo-ream is [5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7 + 3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12 = 85%. ].

As described above, the rate of the display result being "big hit" is higher in the variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream of type Y is executed than in the variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream of type X is executed.

(Production decision processing at the time of starting prize)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-5 in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the effect determination process at the time of start winning, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of commands at the time of start winning based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first start winning opening (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, etc.). And it is confirmed whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S27TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved among the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal reach is achieved, whether or not the super reach is achieved, and whether or not the division effect is executed, based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start, and the like. Outputs a variable category command that specifies the judgment result. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 displays the variation corresponding to the start winning based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start and the table for determining the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4. It is possible to determine the corresponding variation pattern before executing the variation display corresponding to the start winning, and transmit the variation category command based on the determination result to the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can confirm whether or not the split effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning before receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine if it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S27TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has been received (YES in step S27TM1000), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the split effect based on the variable category command received from the CPU 103. Is confirmed (step S27TM1010).

If it is not determined that the division effect is to be executed (NO in step S27TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S27TM1030. If it is determined that the division effect is to be executed (YES in step S27TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag (step S27TM1020), and proceeds to step S27TM1030. The change prohibition flag is set (turned on) in step S27TM1020, and is reset (turned off) at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the received command at the time of the start winning is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S27TM1030). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process ends as it is. If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the final display mode of the active display is determined based on the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) (step). S16TM1010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, the execution presence / absence of the first change effect, and the number of executions based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIG. 9-4) (step S16TM1030), and ends the process as it is.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 (1) to (4), regardless of whether or not the division effect is executed, the first hold display 27TM010 is the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect. The active display 27TM030 is displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011, which is an area different from any of the images 27TM200, and the active display 27TM030 is displayed in the active display area 27TM031 which is an area different from both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S16TM101-10 to step S16TM1030 to display the active display or the hold display. It is possible to execute the first change effect by determining whether or not to execute the first change effect that changes the mode. On the other hand, when the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process of step S16TM101-10 to step S16TM1030 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is, so that the first change effect cannot be executed. ..

In this way, when it is determined that the division effect is to be executed in the judgment at the time of the start winning, the period from the time of the start winning until the end of the variable display which is the judgment target at the time of the start winning, the hold display and the active By not changing the display mode of the display, the player's attention can be directed to "whether or not the division effect is executed". Further, by not changing the display modes of the hold display and the active display when the split effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the split effect.

If it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the period from the time of the starting winning to the start of the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of the starting winning is the hold display or active. Although it is permissible to change the display mode of the display (although the first change effect can be executed), the hold display and the active display are displayed while the variable display accompanied by the split effect is being executed (or the split effect is being executed). The display mode may not be changed (the first change effect cannot be executed).

Assuming that the display mode of the active display is changed while the split effect is being executed, the mode of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 and the timing at which the display mode of the active display is changed may change. Since there is a possibility that the player can easily grasp which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (that is, whether it is a true image for the player), at least the split effect is executed. It is preferable not to execute the action effect for the active display during the period.

On the other hand, while the variable display accompanied by the split effect is being executed (or the split effect is being executed), the display mode of the hold display may not be changed, but the display mode of the active display may be changed. .. For example, by making it possible to change the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the split effect, the active display changes to what mode the active display is executed. The player can be interested in what to do.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may have an effect configuration capable of executing an action effect acting on the hold display or the active display. For example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display hit by the ball may change as the action effect of the ball thrown by the character hitting the hold display or the active display is executed.

Then, when it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the action effect is not executed during the period from the time of the start winning until the end of the variation display that is the judgment target at the time of the start winning. You may do it.

If it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the action effect is executed during the period from the time of the start winning to the start of the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of the start winning. Although it is possible, the action effect may not be executed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the division effect (or the execution of the division effect).

In addition, when it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the period from the time of the starting winning until the end of the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of the starting winning, the hold display and the active display are displayed. While the display mode is not changed (the first change effect cannot be executed), the action effect may be feasible. For example, although the action effect in which the ball thrown by the character hits the hold display or the active display is executed, as a result, the display mode of the hold display or the active display hit by the ball may not change.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, the period during which the split effect is executed during the variable display is the display of the hold display or the active display than the period during which the split effect is not executed during the variable display. The execution rate of the effect that changes the mode (the effect that acts on the hold display or the active display) becomes low.

(Specific example of production video)
Next, a specific example of the production moving image will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie A] which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the division effect is executed. -7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie B] which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the division effect is executed.

As described above, when the division effect is executed in the present embodiment, the image of a predetermined movie corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(Specific example of movie A)
As shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), when the division effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the variation display of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 in the second decorative symbol of "2" and in the second symbol display area 5C2. The pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, respectively. The second decorative symbol at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the second decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <second decorative symbol.

In the example in which the movie A is played as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A, which will be described later, is not displayed when the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the type X (expected) of the pseudo-ream types. (Low degree) pseudo-ream is being executed. Further, in the example in which the movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in the mode (blue or red) of suggesting the set value as in the fourth setting suggestion effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first revariation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (4), the effect control CPU 120 stops the second decorative symbol of "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. By displaying it, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the second production image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the push button 31B at the center of the second effect image 27TM200 to urge the player to operate the push button 31B while continuing the reach state. Display a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. Looks like it is.

In the present embodiment, the time bar 27TM360 is displayed with 100% remaining time at the initial timing when it is displayed, the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases with the passage of time, and the operation promotion display 27TM350 is displayed. At the end timing, the remaining time is displayed as 0%.

However, when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are merely objects in the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Actually, the operation of the push button 31B is not effective even during the display period of the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and the operation is not detected by the operation detecting means of the push sensor 35B.

In the present embodiment, when the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the player operates the push button 31B at the timing when the remaining time of the time bar 27TM360 is displayed at 20%, as will be described later. Regardless of whether or not it was actually performed, an effect image imitating the mode of the cut-in notice effect described later will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (5), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% by the effect control CPU 120 in accordance with the elapse of a predetermined period after the time bar 27TM360 is displayed. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (6), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 was updated to the remaining 20%, did the effect control CPU 120 actually operate the push button 31B by the player? Regardless of whether or not, the cut-in image 27TM370A in which the characters "chance?" Is displayed is displayed as the second production image 27TM200. However, the cut-in image displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The cut-in image 27TM370A is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

In this way, at the timing when the remaining operation valid period suggested by the time bar 27TM360 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 becomes a predetermined period (remaining 20%), the cut-in image regardless of the presence or absence of the actual operation. Will be displayed. That is, when the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the operation of the push button 31B is actually performed, and the same effect as when the operation is detected by the motion detection means of the push sensor 35B is executed. Become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (7), in the effect control CPU 120, the character "battle" is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, and the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed. Display the image of the battle effect to perform the battle. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower center of the image of the battle effect together with the characters "expectation", and the number of object images 27TM550 suggests the expectation of a big hit. There is. However, the object image 27TM550 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

(Specific example of movie B)
As shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the division effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the variation display of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 in the second decorative symbol of "2" and in the second symbol display area 5C2. The pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, respectively. The second decorative symbol at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the second decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <second decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A as the second effect image 27TM200.

In the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed when the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the type Y (high expectation) of the pseudo-ream types is displayed. Pseudo-ream is being executed. Further, in the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in the mode (blue or red) of suggesting the set value as in the fourth setting suggestion effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first revariation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (5), the effect control CPU 120 stops the second decorative symbol of "5" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. By displaying it, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the second production image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the push button 31B at the center of the second effect image 27TM200 to urge the player to operate the push button 31B while continuing the reach state. Display a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. Looks like it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (6), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% in the effect control CPU 120 in accordance with the elapse of a predetermined period after the time bar 27TM360 is displayed. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (7), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 was updated to the remaining 20%, did the effect control CPU 120 actually operate the push button 31B by the player? Regardless of whether or not, as the second production image 27TM200, the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed is displayed. The cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and the friendly character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed. Display the image of the battle effect to perform the battle. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower center of the image of the battle effect together with the characters "expectation", and the number of object images 27TM550 suggests the expectation of a big hit. There is.

(Playback control of production video)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, as a production movie that can be reproduced as the second production image 27TM200 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the division effect, [Movie A (short)] is used. , [Movie A (long)], [Movie B (short)], and [Movie B (long)]. FIG. 10-8 is a time chart showing a reproduction period of each effect moving image when the divided effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, when [Movie A (short)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing of T0). ), After displaying the effect image of [Movie A] shown in FIGS. 10-6 (1) to (3), the display of the effect image of [Movie A] is terminated (timing of TA1). When [Movie A (Long)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing of T0), and FIG. 10-6 (FIG. 10-6). After displaying the effect image of [Movie A] shown in 1) to (7), the display of the effect image of [Movie A] is terminated (TA2 timing).

Here, the production image of [Movie A (short)] (FIGS. 10-6 (1) to (3)) and the production image of the first half of [Movie A (long)] (FIGS. 10-6 (1) to (3)). 3)) is common. Therefore, the reproduction of [Movie A (short)] is sufficient by executing the control to reproduce the first half of [Movie A (long)]. Therefore, the effect data related to [movie A (long)] is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command in the first half of [movie A (long)]. Whether to execute only display control (whether to play [Movie A (short)]) or to execute display control of the entire part (full) of [Movie A (long)] ([Movie A (long)] )] Is determined, and display control is executed based on the determination, so that two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

When [Movie B (Short)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and FIG. 10-7 (FIG. 10-7). After displaying the effect image of [Movie B] shown in 1) to (4), the display of the effect image of [Movie B] is terminated (timing of TB1). When [Movie B (Long)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and FIG. 10-7 (FIG. 10-7). After displaying the effect image of [Movie B] shown in 1) to (8), the display of the effect image of [Movie B] is terminated (timing of TB2).

Here, the effect images of [Movie B (short)] (FIGS. 10-7 (1) to (4)) and the effect images of the first half of [Movie B (long)] (FIGS. 10-7 (1) to (4)). 4)) is common. Therefore, the reproduction of [Movie B (Short)] is sufficient by executing the control to reproduce the first half of [Movie B (Long)]. Therefore, the effect data related to [movie B (long)] is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command in the first half of [movie B (long)]. Whether to execute display control of only ([Movie B (short)] is played), or display control of the entire part (full) of [Movie B (long)] is executed ([Movie B (long)]. )] Is determined, and display control is executed based on the determination, so that two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, by providing a plurality of end timings for one production moving image stored in the ROM 121, it is not necessary to store individual production moving images for each variation pattern accompanied by the divided production. It is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the production data from being excessively increased. Further, by making the end timing of one production video different according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to make the player appear as if a plurality of production videos are prepared.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "off", the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected is [1.5 + 1.5] = 3%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "Movie A (long)" is selected is [1 + 1] = 2%, whereas the display result is "big hit". In this case, the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected is [6 + 6] = 12%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected is [7 + 7] = 14. %. Therefore, the rate of big hits is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected than when the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "off", the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of "movie B (short)" is [1 + 1] = 2%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "Movie B (long)" is selected is [0.5 + 0.5] = 1%, whereas the display result is "big hit". In this case, the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B (short)" is selected is [10 + 10] = 20%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected is [12 + 12] = 24. %. Therefore, the rate of big hits is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected than when the fluctuation pattern of "movie B (short)" is selected.

Therefore, when "Movie A" is played, the longer the playing period (the later the end timing), the higher the expectation of a big hit, and even when "Movie B" is played, the playing period is long. The higher the expectation of a big hit (the later the end timing). By performing such effect control, the player can continue the divided effect for as long as possible (the movie is played for as long as possible) once the divided effect is executed (once the movie is played). You will expect that.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "off", the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of "movie A" is [1.5 + 1 + 1]. .5 + 1] = 5%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "Movie B" is selected is [1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5] = 3%, whereas the display result is "big hit". , The rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A" is selected is [6 + 7 + 6 + 7] = 26%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B" is selected is [10 + 12 + 10 + 12] = 44%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the case where the movie B, which is a production movie having a relatively long playback period, is played, rather than the case where the movie A, which is a production movie having a relatively short playback period, is played. However, the rate of big hits is high.

Therefore, the player expects that the movie B is played more than the movie A when the split effect is executed, that is, the effect movie having a relatively long playback period is played.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the longer the playback period of the production video is, the higher the expectation of big hit is. However, the expectation of big hit is higher as the playback period is shorter, depending on the type of the production video. May be higher. Further, the production configuration may be such that the playback period of the production video and the jackpot expectation are not related (the jackpot expectation does not change depending on the end timing of the production video).

(Specific example of pseudo-continuous production)
As the pseudo-continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, as described above, the pseudo-continuous effect of type X (hereinafter, also referred to as pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak]) and the pseudo-continuous effect of type Y (hereinafter, pseudo-continuous effect [] Y: also called [strong]). The rate at which the display result is a "big hit" is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed than when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. Specific examples of the pseudo-continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B4).

10-9 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] is executed, and FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to 10-9 (A3). (B1) to (B4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed.

(Specific example of pseudo-continuous production [X: weak])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol of "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R as the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. Each is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbol to be re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

(Specific example of pseudo-continuous production [Y: strong])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol of "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R as the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Each is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, and the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C. In this state, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol including the pseudo-ream pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the pseudo-ream effect image (the display layer is higher than the pseudo-ream effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front). Has been done. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol including the pseudo-ream pattern, the pseudo-ream effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <pseudo-ream effect image <decorative symbol.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong], and operates the movable body 27TM600 from the tilted position to the upright position. In this example, the movable body 27TM600 is positioned in front of the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 because the movable body 27TM600 operates in the upright position. That is, since the pseudo-ream pattern 27TM300 related to the pseudo-ream effect and the movable body 27TM600 after operation have a corresponding positional relationship, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is an effect image corresponding to the pseudo-ream pattern 27TM300 and is in an upright position. It is also an effect image corresponding to the movable body 27TM600 in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the revariation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and displays the movable body 27TM600. By operating from the standing position to the tilted position, the movable body production is completed.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream effect [X: weak] is executed, after the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is not displayed and the movable body effect is executed. However, the re-variation display of the decorative pattern is being executed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong] is executed, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed after the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body 27TM600 operates from the tilted position to the upright position. .. Next, the re-variation display of the decorative pattern is executed, and the movable body 27TM600 operates from the standing position to the tilted position.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 10-9, the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the state where the division effect is not executed. Although the example to be executed has been described, the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] and the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] are the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image when the divided effect is being executed. It is feasible at least one of the display areas 27TM200A.

That is, as the division effect is executed, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as the decorative identification information is executed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, and the first Based on the decorative pattern, either the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed. Further, as the division effect is executed, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as the decorative identification information is executed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200, and the second Based on the decorative pattern, either the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed.

However, in the present embodiment, in the state where the split effect is not executed (example shown in FIG. 10-9), the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A corresponds to the execution of the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong]. Is displayed and the movable body effect is executed, but in the state where the split effect is executed (example shown in FIG. 10-7), the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Correspondingly, although the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, the movable body effect is not executed.

(Outline of setting suggestion production)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can execute the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value of the game machine. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of executing the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect in addition to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect described in [Characteristic unit 16TM]. Is also possible.

In the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect, when the split effect is not executed, the timing at which the decorative symbol stops in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (pseudo-ream in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). By determining the mode of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at different ratios according to the set value in (including the timing when the symbol temporarily stops), the mode of the displayed effect image depends on the mode. This is an effect that suggests a set value.

Further, in the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect, when the division effect is being executed, the timing at which the first decorative symbol stops in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (first symbol display area). The mode of the effect image displayed in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is determined at a different ratio according to the set value in 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 including the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops). This is an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode of the displayed effect image.

In the present embodiment, when (i) the variation pattern is "non-reach", the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing when the decorative symbol stops. (Ii) When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach or super reach without pseudo-ream", the timing at which the same decorative symbol stops in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R to enter the reach state (when accompanied by a split effect). Is capable of executing the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect at the timing when the same first decorative symbol stops in the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1 and enters the reach state). (Iii) When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach or super reach with pseudo-ream", the timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol first temporarily stops in the symbol display area 5C (in the case of accompanied by a division effect, the first symbol is displayed). The third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing (timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol first temporarily stops in the area 5C1).

The decorative symbol (including the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed has a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is seen by the player. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol (including the pseudo-continuous symbol), the effect image, and the background image when the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed is as follows: background image <effect image <decorative symbol. It is getting higher in order.

The details will be described later, but when the third setting suggestion effect is executed in the present embodiment, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the split effect is executed, the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, When the effect image displayed in 5R1) becomes gold and the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R (when the division effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1, The effect image displayed on 5C1, 5R1) is blue or red.

Further, when neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed in the present embodiment, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (when the division effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1). The effect image displayed on, 5C1, 5R1) becomes white.

In this way, by displaying the setting suggestion information (effect image) that suggests the set value corresponding to the stop position of the decorative symbol, the player displays not only the stopped decorative symbol but also the decorative symbol. We will also pay attention to the setting suggestion information that is given.

Further, in the first embodiment, the setting suggestion is not performed by the second effect image 27TM200, and the image in the movie reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200 includes the image related to the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth. None of the images related to the setting suggestion effect are displayed. Therefore, the effect image of the decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 is white.

(Outline of cut-in notice production)
Next, a notice effect for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the advance notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-13 (2) to (4) described later, the effect control CPU 120 is in a reach state with the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the division effect is not executed. At this time, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the operation promotion display 27TM350 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B and the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are notified. The time bar 27TM360 is displayed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the screen. .. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire central area in the vertical direction of the screen. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters of "reach !!").

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first when the reach state is established in the first decorative symbols of the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1 when the divided effect is executed. In the central portion of the effect image display area 27TM100A, an operation promotion display 27TM350 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective are provided. Display it.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the central portion of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Perform a cut-in notice effect. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire vertical central area of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters of "reach !!") of the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command that specifies the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the variable display period and production contents of the special symbol A variation display of a special symbol is executed based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, super reach, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103). In addition, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the content of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the split effect, the movie type of the split effect (movie A (short), movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)), and the movie type B (long) are determined by the variation pattern specification command. The number of pseudo-reams (0, 1, 2) and the pseudo-ream type (type X, type Y) are specified. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the split effect in response to the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed based on the received variation pattern designation command, and determines whether or not to execute the split effect. It is possible to determine the mode, and it is also possible to determine the number of pseudo-reams and the mode of the pseudo-ream when the pseudo-ream is executed.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this variation start effect determination process, the execution presence / absence and the effect mode of each of the third setting suggestion effect, the fourth setting suggestion effect, and the cut-in notice effect are determined.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands (holding storage number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol. , An effect control pattern for executing the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol based on the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect). A collection of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIGS. 10-10.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value is "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value designation command is "6") (step S27TM2000). If the set value is not "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is not "6") (NO in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S27TM2030. ..

When the set value is "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6") (YES in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines the third setting suggestion effect. The execution presence / absence is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table (see FIG. 10-11 (A)) of the third setting suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step S27TM2020.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the third setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the third setting suggestion effect is executed only when the set setting value is "6". A value has been assigned. When the set value is "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6"), the effect control CPU 120 has a third setting suggestion effect at a rate of 99.5%. Is decided not to be executed, and it is decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect at a rate of 0.5%.

In this way, only when the set value is "6" (that is, only when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6"), whether or not to execute the third setting suggestion effect is determined. , The third setting suggestion effect is executed based on the decision result. When the third setting suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the set value set for the game machine is "6", so that the player executes the third setting suggestion effect. You will be very interested in whether or not, and you will expect the effect image of the decorative pattern to be displayed in gold.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect (step S27TM2020). If it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (YES in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S27TM2040.

When it is not decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect (NO in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, and whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed. The determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 10-11 (B)), and the process proceeds to step S27TM2040.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the fourth setting suggestion effect, the determination for determining the execution / non-execution of the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode according to the set setting value. A value has been assigned.

When the set value of the effect control CPU 120 is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1", "3", "5". In any case), it was decided not to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, and it was decided to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect at a rate of 40%. It is decided to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of%.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is "2", "4", "6". In any case), it was decided not to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, and it was decided to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of%.

In this way, when the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "1", "3", and "5". In this case), the ratio of the effect image of the decorative design displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of the effect image of the decorative design displayed in blue. On the other hand, when the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "2", "4", and "6". In some cases), the proportion of the decorative symbol effect image displayed in red is higher than the proportion of the decorative symbol effect image displayed in blue.

Therefore, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which the blue effect image is displayed is an effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number (the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5"). There is. In addition, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which the red effect image is displayed is an effect suggesting that the set value is an even number (the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6"). There is. As described above, the fourth setting suggestion effect is an even-odd number suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (step S27TM2040). When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the fluctuation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode, and determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed (FIG. 10-11). It is determined based on (see (C)) (step S27TM2050), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the cut-in notice effect, the execution / non-execution and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect are determined according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. Judgment value for is assigned.

When the display result is "off", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80%, and cut-in image 27TM370A (called "chance?") At a rate of 15%. Decided to execute a cut-in notice effect to display the cut-in image with characters displayed), and display the cut-in image 27TM370B (cut-in image with the characters "Chance!" Displayed) at a rate of 8%. Decide to execute the cut-in notice effect, and execute the cut-in notice effect that displays the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image with the characters "Great chance !!" displayed) at a rate of 2%. To decide.

When the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, and cut-in image 27TM370A (called "chance?") At a rate of 15%. Decided to execute a cut-in notice effect to display the cut-in image with characters displayed), and display the cut-in image 27TM370B (cut-in image with the characters "Chance!" Displayed) at a rate of 20%. Decide to execute the cut-in notice effect, and execute the cut-in notice effect that displays the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image with the characters "Great chance !!" displayed) at a rate of 25%. To decide.

(Specific example of the third setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the third setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A3). 10-12 (A1) to (A3) show the case where the set value is "6" (that is, the case where the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6") and the fluctuation pattern is "6". It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the 3rd setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing (the timing of (i) mentioned above) when the decorative symbol stops in the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach off".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), based on the fluctuation pattern being "non-reach out of reach", the effect control CPU 120 states that the display result is "out of reach" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of non-reach decorative symbols (“247” in this example) is stopped and displayed, the third setting suggestion effect is executed, and the golden effect image 27TM400D is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Display it.

The decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the command for designating and stopping the decorative symbol from the main board 11 is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By erasing the golden effect image 27TM400D, the third setting suggestion effect is terminated, and in response to the variation display result of the first special symbol being "off", the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. , The combination of decorative symbols (“247” in this example) whose display result is “off” is fixedly stopped. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets "247" in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r based on the fact that the combination of decorative symbols to be fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is "247". The combination of the first small symbols of is fixedly stopped.

(Specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3). 10-12 (B1) to (B3) show the case where the set value is "6" (that is, the case where the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6") and the fluctuation pattern is "6". An example in which the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops (the timing of (iii) described above) in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach or super reach with pseudo-ream of type X". It is explanatory drawing which shows.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), based on the fluctuation pattern being "normal reach or super reach with pseudo-ream of type X", the effect control CPU 120 has a pseudo-ream effect [X: weak]. Along with the execution, the decorative symbol of "2" is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the red effect image 27TM400C in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively, based on the determination to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect. Let me.

The decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the command for designating and stopping the decorative symbol from the main board 11 is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By erasing the red effect image 27TM400C, the fourth setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

(Specific example of cut-in notice production)
Next, a specific example of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 (1) to (4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Further, in FIG. 10-13, the mode of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. The push button mode includes a blinking mode suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (turning off mode) suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

When the effect image shown in FIG. 10-13 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are not displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is valid. The push button 31B is in a normal mode (light-off mode) in response to the fact that the push button 31B is not used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the effect control CPU 120 puts the decorative symbol of "7" into a reach state by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The characters "reach !!" are displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the push button 31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to operate the push button 31B while continuing the reach state. Display a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. Looks like it is.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and corresponds to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is enabled (corresponding to the start of the operation valid period). The push button 31B is switched from the normal mode (light-off mode) to the blinking mode.

In the operation standby state in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (although it is within the operation valid period), but the operation of the push button 31B is not yet detected by the push sensor 35B, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 Is displayed continuously. The time bar 27TM360 displays 100% of the remaining time at the initial timing when it is displayed, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases as the time elapses in the operation standby state. In this operation standby state, the push button 31B is in a blinking mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (3), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% as a predetermined period elapses in the operation standby state. Then, the push button 31B is continuously blinking in response to the operation standby state.

Next, it is assumed that the push button 31B is operated by the player within the operation valid period before the display of the time bar 27TM360 becomes 0% remaining. At this time, the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B, so that the operation standby state ends. The effect control CPU 120 hides (erases) the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 in response to the end of the operation standby state, and blinks the push button 31B from the blinking mode to the normal mode (turning off mode). Switch to. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B within the operation valid period.

In the example of the cut-in notice effect shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed is displayed in the entire central region of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction of the screen. .. The cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters “reach !!”). Further, when the cut-in image is displayed, the push button 31B corresponds to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled (corresponding to the operation completed within the operation valid period). It is in the normal mode (light-off mode).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is displayed, suddenly, a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and is related to the other effect). Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed on the front side of the image) is displayed, it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Further, since there are a plurality of cut-in images as in the present embodiment, there is an interest in which cut-in image is displayed.

(Setting suggestion effect during split effect)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the division effect is being executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. The setting suggestion effect is not executed in. An example of the effect in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 12-19.

10-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the divided effect is executed, and FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19 are effect images of each effect when the divided effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example.

In this example, at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the effect control of the first pattern is executed in which the variation pattern is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the same time, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. 1 pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”has been decided.

The effect control CPU 120 has a decorative pattern based on a variation pattern command in which the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is specified. Perform a variable display of. In this fluctuation pattern, during the period in which the split effect is executed, after the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed twice in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, the ally is used as a super reach effect. A battle effect B is executed to notify whether or not the character and the enemy character B have won a big hit by performing a battle, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen is based on the movie B (long). The production image will be displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation (step S27TM2030), and the cut-in with the characters "Great chance !!" is displayed. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect for displaying the image 27TM370C (step S27TM2050).

In FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the mode of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. The push button mode includes a blinking mode suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (turning off mode) suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 is an image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), in the state where the division effect is not executed and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the cut-in notice effect is produced. The push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-off mode) in response to the fact that it is not the timing to execute (the timing is not the timing at which the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 should be displayed).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts the split effect at the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-14). In this example, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A set on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A based on the execution of the effect control of the first pattern, and the effect display is performed. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A set on the left side of the area 27TM005A.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the first effect image display area 27TM100A with the start of the divided effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces [Movie B] in the second effect image display area 27TM200A with the start of the split effect. Therefore, as the second effect image 27TM200, an effect image based on [Movie B] is displayed. At this time, based on the reproduced [Movie B], the variable display of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2.

Further, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of is continued.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (2) and later, in the state where the split effect is executed, regardless of whether or not it is the timing to execute the cut-in notice effect (operation promotion display 27TM350 and time bar 27TM360). The push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-off mode) regardless of whether or not it is the timing to display.

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 has the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing for executing the first pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. The first decorative symbol of "3" is temporarily stopped (the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 and the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). That is, the red effect image 27TM400C is displayed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, respectively.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has a second decorative symbol of "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 at a predetermined timing when the first pseudo continuous effect is executed by the first decorative symbol. Are temporarily stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the second symbol display area 5C2, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, respectively (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). ).

In this way, when it is decided that neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed as the second effect image 27TM200 based on the [movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. A production image that imitates the production will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the red effect image 27TM400C in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 in a pseudo-continuous effect [Y]. : Strong] is executed, and the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image 27TM400C (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a state where the white effect image 27TM400A is continuously displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. (Timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-14).

In this way, as the second effect image 27TM200 based on the [movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the effect image imitating the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), when the split effect is not executed, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed in response to the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong] being executed. At the same time, the movable body effect in which the movable body 27TM600 operates was executed. However, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the split effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Correspondingly, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.

In the pseudo-ream effect when the split effect is not executed, the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C and the movable body 27TM600 that is operating and in the standing position are in a corresponding positional relationship. The person can easily grasp that the movable body effect is executed in response to the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong].

On the other hand, if the movable body effect is executed along with the pseudo continuous effect while the divided effect is being executed, the operation of the movable body 27TM600 is either the first effect image 27TM100 or the second effect image 27TM200. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether the image corresponds to the above. Further, the movable body 27TM600 in the upright position further reduces the visibility of the effect image displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, which are smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A. Further, it is necessary to set which of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 is associated with the movable body control command for controlling the operation of the movable body 27TM600, which complicates the effect control. To do.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the division effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed. Here, since the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the same manner as when the split effect is not executed due to the execution of the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong], "pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong] is displayed. : Strong] is executed, but the movable body 27TM600 does not operate. ”It is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the revariation display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T6 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes revariation display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 based on [Movie B] (timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 10-14). ..

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 has the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing for executing the second pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. The first decorative symbol of "3" is temporarily stopped (the timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image in the reach state in the second effect image display area 27TM200A based on [Movie B]. In this example, the second decorative symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 to enter the reach state, and the "reach! The characters "!" Are displayed, and the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A (timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (6) to 10-17 (8), the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed regardless of whether or not the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the state where the division effect is executed. , The push button 31B is in a normal mode (light-off mode). Here, in FIG. 10-16 (6), the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and these are only displayed as images in the movie. Absent. Therefore, the operation is not actually valid, and even if the player operates the push button 31B, the execution control of the cut-in notice effect is not performed in response to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the execution of the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong]. Display (timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is an effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 50%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (8), the effect control CPU 120 executes the revariation display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T10 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is an effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 25%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first decorative symbol of "3" in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Each is stopped and displayed to enter the reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has a "chance" regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A is updated to the remaining 20%. The cut-in image 27TM370B on which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images being displayed (Fig. 10-14). Timing of T11 shown). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed as the effect image based on [Movie B].

At the timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 10-14, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed based on the determination that the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image display area 27TM100A is executed. At the same time, the operation is valid. By operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period, the cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. However, in the state where the division effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-off mode) regardless of whether or not the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. In the example shown in 17 (9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode) despite the operation valid period.

In the present embodiment, when the division effect is not executed, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (light-off mode) to the blinking mode in response to the display of the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360. At the same time, it shifts to the operation validity period. Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 27TM005A in response to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-13).

On the other hand, when the split effect is executed, when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the first effect image display area 27TM100A side, the push button 31B blinks from the normal mode (light-off mode). The push button 31B shifts to the operation valid period in the normal mode (light-off mode) without changing to (see FIG. 10-17 (9)). Then, the cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-18 (10) described later).

Further, when the split effect is executed, when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the second effect image display area 27TM200A side, the push button 31B blinks from the normal mode (light-off mode). Does not change to, and does not shift to the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-16 (6)). Then, the cut-in image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A at a predetermined timing regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated.

That is, during the period during which the division effect is being executed, regardless of whether or not the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and whether or not the operation of the push button 31B is valid. By leaving the push button 31B in the normal mode (light-off mode) instead of the lighting mode, the player can easily grasp which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (whether it is the true effect). It is not possible.

In the present embodiment, during the execution of the divided effect, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. Although an example that can be executed is shown, not limited to such a form, the operation promotion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A during the execution of the divided effect, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. Then, the operation promotion effect may not be executed.

Further, unlike the above example, the operation promotion effect may not be executed in any of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during the execution of the divided effect. For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by a division effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a notice effect accompanied by an operation promotion effect in the effect determination process at the start of the variation. Instead, other types of advance notice effects may be selected. That is, the type of advance notice effect that can be executed when the divided effect is not executed includes the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, but the type of advance notice effect that can be executed when the divided effect is executed is selected. May not include the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the division effect is not executed, the push button 31B switches from the normal mode (light-off mode) to the lighting mode when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. When the division effect is executed, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode) when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. Therefore, the light emitting device for changing the mode of the push button 31B (for example, the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B and emitting light during the operation effective period) corresponds to the period during which the division effect is not executed. It can be called a device.

As described above, the effect device corresponding to the period during which the divided effect is not executed may not be operated during the variation display period of the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B in the effect determination process at the start of variation when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not accompany the division effect. However, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern accompanied by a division effect, the mode of the push button 31B in the effect determination process at the start of variation It is impossible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the.

In this way, by not operating the predetermined effect device during the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect), it is possible to determine which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp the image, and the interest of the divided production can be improved.

Here, if the light emission control of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED is executed in correspondence with each of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 when the division effect is being executed, the LED The commands (illumination signals) to the control board 14 interfere with each other, which causes a problem that proper LED control becomes difficult. In the present embodiment, such a problem occurs by not causing the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B to emit light during the execution period of the division effect (or during the variation display of the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect). I try not to.

Further, an effect device (for example, a decorative LED) that can be operated only when the division effect is being executed (or when the variation display of the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect is being executed) may be provided. For example, the first decorative LED that does not emit light when the divided effect is not executed and emits light corresponding to the effect of the first effect image display area 27TM100A when the divided effect is executed, and the divided effect are executed. A second decorative LED may be provided which does not emit light when it is not used and emits light corresponding to the effect of the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the divided effect is being executed. In this way, by providing the effect device dedicated to the split effect, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (10), the effect control CPU 120 is pushed by the player within the operation valid period in which the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. At the timing when the operation of 31B is performed and the operation is detected by the push sensor 35B (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 10-14), the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance !!" are displayed is displayed. The cut-in notice effect to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A is executed.

At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is continuously displayed as the effect image based on [Movie B].

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (11), the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance !!" are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. (Timing of T13 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed based on the [movie B] being played in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. 2 In the effect image display area 27TM200A, the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed together with the characters "battle" (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Further, at this time, two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed at the lower part of the second effect image display area 27TM200A together with the characters "expectation".

As described above, as the effect image based on [Movie B] being played in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the image related to the battle effect of Super Reach A (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A), and 2 The star-shaped object image 27TM550) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (12), the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance !!" are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) are displayed together with the characters "battle" (timing of T14 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Further, at this time, four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed at the lower part of the first effect image display area 27TM100A together with the characters "expectation".

As described above, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the images of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B), and the image of the enemy character B (27TM510B), as the effect image corresponding to the battle effect of the super reach B designated by the variation pattern designation command, and Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed.

In response to the development of the super reach effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. The effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100 without enlarging the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIGS. 10-14. In this enlarged display period, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200 and is superimposed so that it can be seen by the player. Aspect) is displayed.

That is, the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period has a relationship of the second effect image 27TM200 <the first effect image 27TM100, and the enlarged display of the first effect image 27TM100 Along with this, the displayed area of the second effect image 27TM200 is reduced (see FIG. 10-18 (12)). In this way, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period. It will be enhanced. Then, the enlarged display of the first effect image 27TM100 completely covers the second effect image 27TM200, so that the second effect image 27TM200 becomes invisible (hidden).

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (13), the effect control CPU 120 is divided at the timing when the first effect image 27TM100 is expanded to substantially the same size as the effect display area 27TM005A (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 10-14). End the production. At the timing when the split effect is finished, the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and the image of the enemy character B (27TM510B) are displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the effect image corresponding to the battle effect of the super reach B specified by the variation pattern specification command. Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed. Further, by blinking the four star-shaped object images 27TM550 displayed at the bottom of the screen after the division effect is completed, a plurality of expectations (two stars) shown to the player during the execution of the division effect are performed. And 4 stars), the expectation degree (4 stars) finally selected corresponding to the fluctuation display is notified.

That is, even after the end of the division effect, the effect information (images of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B)) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the division effect, and four star-shaped objects. Since the effect information common to the image 27TM550) is continuously displayed on the screen, the player can perform the effect corresponding to the hidden first effect image 27TM100 (super reach B battle effect). You can understand that it is continuing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the division effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the left side of the screen. The second production image 27TM200 is displayed. In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, a setting suggestion effect determined based on the effect determination process at the start of variation may be executed together with the effect based on the variation pattern designation command. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a predetermined movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is played, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

If the setting suggestion effect is executed for the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in parallel on the left and right while the split effect is being executed, either the left or right setting is performed. There is a problem that the player is confused as to whether the set value should be estimated based on the suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, the occurrence of such a problem can be prevented by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (2 times and 1 time) and the mode of the cut-in image ("" It is possible to make different modes of display information related to the degree of expectation of a big hit, such as "Big chance !!" and "Chance!"), And the characters (character B and character A) that appear. As a result, the interest of the divided production can be further improved.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)]" Based on the selection of, the first effect image 27TM100 executes the pseudo-ream twice, whereas the second effect image 27TM200 executes the pseudo-ream only once. Further, in the first production image 27TM100, the characters "big chance !!" with the highest expectation of big hits are displayed, whereas in the second production image 27TM200, the "chance" with the second highest expectation of big hits is displayed. The characters "!" Are displayed. Further, in the first production image 27TM100, the character B (27TM510B) appears as a super reach B with a high expectation of a big hit in the super reach, whereas in the second production image 27TM200, a big hit in the super reach Character A (27TM510A) appears as it develops into Super Reach A with low expectations.

As described above, the first effect image 27TM100, which has a long display period, has a higher ratio of displaying the effect information with a high expectation of big hit than the second effect image 27TM200, which has a short display period. In this example, the second production image 27TM200 shows an example in which the production image is based on the movie B (long), but any of the movie B (short), the movie A (long), and the movie A (short). In this case as well, it is assumed that the first effect image 27TM100, which has a long display period, has a higher proportion of the effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200, which has a short display period.

With such a production configuration, the player has a feeling of expectation that the production information having a high expectation of a big hit is the first production image 27TM100, and the interest of the divided production can be improved. it can.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the description of the parts common to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted. Unlike the game machine according to the first embodiment, the game machine according to the second embodiment can execute the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in the second embodiment. As shown in steps S27TM2000 to S27TM2030, the gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not to execute the third setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the third setting suggestion effect, similarly to the game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed. Further, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the fourth setting suggestion effect are determined, and the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. It is possible to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in step S27TM2040 to step S27TM2050, the gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, as in the game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed.

Here, in the effect determination process at the start of the variation of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by the division effect. (Step S27TM3000). Then, in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by a divided effect (YES in step S27TM3000), whether or not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined. Whether or not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined (step S27TM3010).

The fifth setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value by the display color of the first effect image frame 27TM110 corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Further, the fifth setting suggestion effect is also an effect of suggesting a set value by the display color of the second effect image frame 27TM210 corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A1), when the set value of the game machine is any of 1, 3 and 5, that is, when it is an odd number setting, it is 60%. Decided not to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 1st effect image 27TM100 at a rate, and decided to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 1st effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the setting value of the game machine is any of 2, 4, or 6, that is, when the setting value is an even number, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is performed at a rate of 60%. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%, and red color corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white. Further, when it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. When it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red aspect, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red.

Therefore, the player is likely to have an odd number of settings when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, and sets when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red. I presume that the value is likely to be even. Further, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the first effect image frame 27TM110.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A2), when the set value of the game machine is any of 1, 3 and 5, that is, when the setting value is an odd number, 80%. Decided not to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 2nd effect image 27TM200 at a rate, and decided to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 2nd effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%. Then, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%. On the other hand, when the setting value of the game machine is any of 2, 4, or 6, that is, when the setting value is an even number, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is performed at a rate of 80%. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%, and red corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%. It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white. Further, when it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the second effect image 27TM200. When it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

Therefore, the player is likely to have an odd number of settings when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, and sets when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red. I presume that the value is likely to be even. Further, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the second effect image frame 27TM210.

As described above, (1) the fifth setting suggestion effect was executed as a common point between the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. In this case, the effect image frame is displayed in blue or red, but when the fifth setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image frame is displayed in white, and (2) the effect image frame is displayed in blue. If this is done, the ratio of the set values being odd is high, and if the effect image frame is displayed in red, the ratio of the set values being even is high.

On the other hand, the execution rate (40%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution rate (20%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, the ratio of the set value being an odd number when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of the set value being an odd number when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue. The ratio of the set value being even when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red is higher than the ratio of the set value being even when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

As described above, the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, the ratio of the setting value suggested in the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 corresponding to the set value of the actual game machine is the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. The setting value suggested by the production is higher than the ratio corresponding to the setting value of the actual game machine. That is, the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

In this way, it is possible to make the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A different from the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

FIG. 10-22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the fifth setting suggestion effect is executed with the execution of the divided effect, and is shown in FIGS. 10-2 (1) and (2) of the first embodiment. It is a corresponding figure. As shown in FIG. 10-22 (1), before the execution of the division effect, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decoration identification information is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative design (main production design) is displayed in a variable manner. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of two sets of background images and decorative patterns based on the background image and decorative pattern in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the divided effect is executed. Appear on region 27TM005A. The combination of one of them becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-22 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A together with the first effect image frame 27TM110 as the divided effect is executed. The effect image 27TM100 is displayed, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed together with the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen. ing.

Then, in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variation display of the first decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second In the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-22 (2), the first effect image frame 27TM110 is red based on the decision to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. The second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue based on the decision to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

Here, in this example, when the split effect is executed, both the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed. There is. Not limited to such an example, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue or red), while the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed. The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect may not be executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white). Further, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue or red), while the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed. The effect may not be executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white).

Further, when the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed in a common manner (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is blue. When the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in blue, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in red).

FIG. 10-23 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the divided effect is executed by the gaming machine of the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-14 of the first embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 10-14, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, the fluctuation pattern is displayed, the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image is displayed. The effect control of the first pattern displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the split effect in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played is executed, and the type with high expectation. It is determined that the pseudo-ream of Y is executed twice as "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]".

As shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23, in the second embodiment, during the period when the divided effect is executed, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed. The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed in parallel. That is, in the fifth setting suggestion effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in which the effect having a high expectation of big hit is executed, and in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in which the effect having a low expectation is executed is high. It is possible to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in parallel.

FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the division effect of the second embodiment is completed. 10-24 (12) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-18 (12) of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10-24 (13) is a diagram of FIG. 10-19 (13) of the first embodiment. It is a corresponding figure.

In response to the development of the super reach effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 is the first effect image together with the first effect image frame 27TM110 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed. 27TM100 is enlarged and displayed. The effect control CPU 120 expands the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect is executed during the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIGS. 10-14. The combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed is gradually enlarged and displayed without causing the display. In this enlarged display period, the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 (second effect image frame 27TM210 and second effect image 27TM200). 2 The display layer is higher than the combination of the effect image 27TM200, and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can see the image in the foreground.

That is, the display priority of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the enlarged display period has a relationship of the second effect image frame 27TM210 <the first effect image frame 27TM110, and the first effect image frame 27TM110. As the 27TM110 is enlarged and displayed, the display area of the second effect image frame 27TM210 is reduced (see FIG. 10-24 (12)). In this way, the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image frame 27TM110 is higher than that of the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period. It will be higher than the visibility. Then, the enlarged display of the first effect image frame 27TM110 completely covers the second effect image frame 27TM210, so that the second effect image frame 27TM210 becomes invisible (hidden).

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (13), in the effect control CPU 120, the timing at which the first effect image frame 27TM110 is expanded to substantially the same size as the frame of the effect display area 27TM005A (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 10-23). Then, the split production is finished.

As shown above, when the split effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. It is possible to improve the interest of setting suggestion production. Here, since it is possible to make the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A different from the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the split effect It is possible to further improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect that is being executed in parallel in.

However, as for the gaming machine of the second embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the third setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "6" in the second effect image display area 27TM200A ( Setting 6 final effect) is not executed.

Assuming that the third setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is high is executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200, which has a short display period and a high rate of execution of the effect with low expectation, the first effect If the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the image 27TM100 is not executed, the second effect image 27TM200 may be hidden at an early timing, which may discourage the player. In addition, the player has doubts about the reliability of the third setting suggestion effect executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200. In the present embodiment, the fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, but the third setting suggestion effect that suggests a specific setting value with high reliability is not executed. I try not to cause such a problem.

(Modification example of feature 27TM)
Next, a modified example of the [feature unit 27TM] will be described.

(1) As shown in the feature unit 16TM described above, the setting suggestion effect may suggest a set value by the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the mini slot 16TM030 to be displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the mini slot 16TM030 is variedly displayed. By doing so, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first setting suggestion effect as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value. In this first setting suggestion effect, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination. By doing so, it is a production that makes the role of "Bell" established. That is, based on the fact that the combination of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. It is recognized that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting the above has been executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G) described above, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of execution of the first setting suggestion effect. Will be done. In the present embodiment, since the effect determination process at the start of the variation is executed each time the variation display is executed, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is set to [bell] or "off". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, and the first relative to the number of times the variable display is executed. You will also be interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect).

As described above, the configuration capable of executing the first setting suggestion effect can be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment or the gaming machine of the second embodiment. However, while the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed during the period when the split effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed. To do.

Since the first setting suggestion effect suggests the set value according to the number of executions, it is difficult for the player to guess the set value just by looking at the winning combination of the variable display of the displayed mini-slot. Is. Due to the characteristics of the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second mini-slot corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are tentatively displayed during the execution of the split effect. , If the first setting suggestion effect is executed in parallel in the first mini-slot and the second mini-slot, the player will be confused. Therefore, during the execution of the divided effect, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed.

(2) Not limited to the form shown in the above modification (1), during the fluctuation display period based on the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the division effect, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second setting suggestion effect and the second. It is also possible not to execute any of the first setting suggestion effects corresponding to the effect image 27TM200.

For example, among the variation display periods based on the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect, the period during which the division effect is not executed (the period before the execution of the division effect and the period after the execution of the division effect) is the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. A mini slot 16TM030 displayed in a special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003, which is an area corresponding to neither the first effect image display area 27TM100A nor the second effect image display area 27TM200A). Although one setting suggestion effect can be executed, both the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed during the execution period of the split effect. You may not execute it.

As described above, when the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 which does not correspond to any of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the execution period of the divided effect is In the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the variation display of the mini-slot symbol may be continuously executed so that the mini-slot symbol is not stopped. By such effect control, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the effect display area 27TM005A (entire screen) during the execution period of the divided effect.

(3) Further, in the first and second embodiments described above, in at least one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during the execution period of the divided effect. , An example in which any type of setting suggestion effect can be executed is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and during the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variation display period based on the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect) In both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

During the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variable display period based on the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect), the effect display area 27TM005A including the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (entire screen). ), The setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display changes at a lower rate during the period in which the divided effect is executed than in the period in which the divided effect is not executed. Not limited to the form, the display mode of the active display may be changed at a higher rate during the period when the divided effect is executed than during the period when the divided effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to be interested in how the active display changes in response to the execution of the split effect.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the set value of the game machine has been described, but the setting suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the power source of the game machine is used for the setting suggestion effect. It may be an effect that suggests whether or not the set value has been changed when the setting value is input. For example, when the setting change mode for changing the set value is controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is not controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on. A predetermined setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, the types of setting suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, fifth setting suggestion effect) that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second setting suggestion effect. There is a type of setting suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) that can be executed in the effect image display area 27TM200A, and a setting suggestion that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A but not in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. While there are types of effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect), there are types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Explained an example that does not exist.

Not limited to such a form, a type of setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A may be provided. For example, the fifth setting suggestion effect may be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, but may not be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(7) In the above embodiment, it can be executed only in one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (for example, the first effect image display area 27TM100A), and the other area. Although the effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, etc.) that are not executed in (for example, the second effect image display area 27TM200A) have been described, not limited to such a form, these effects are described in the other area. Is also feasible, and may be performed in the other area at a lower rate than in one area.

(8) The gaming machine shown in the above embodiment is, for example, a right-eye image (R) and a left-eye image (R) for forming a stereoscopic image, similarly to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-191660 and the like. A display body (for example, an image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying L) alternately arranged in the horizontal direction and a display body provided in front of the display body are provided to prevent the player's left eye from visually recognizing the right eye image (R). In addition, it is provided with a stereoscopic image display means (for example, an image display device 5) having a parallax forming body (for example, a lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image (L) for the left eye by the right eye. You may.

Here, in the ROM of the effect control board, image data of a stereoscopic image (for stereoscopic viewing) (image data of the image for the right eye (R) and image data of the image for the left eye (L)) and a non-stereoscopic image (planar view) are stored. It is assumed that the image data of) is stored. The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or VDP) causes the display body to display the right-eye image (R) and the left-eye image (L) alternately in the horizontal direction based on the image data of the stereoscopic image. It is possible to execute one control and a second control for displaying the non-stereoscopic image on the display body based on the image data of the non-stereoscopic image.

When the display control means executes the first control, only the right eye image (R) is visually recognized from the player's right eye without the left eye image (L) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body, and the game is played. From the left eye of the person, only the left eye image (L) is visually recognized without the right eye image (R) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body. Then, due to the effect that a fusion image is generated at the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the image for the right eye (the line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the player's left eye and the image for the left eye (the line of sight of the left eye), the left eye Stereoscopic viewing based on the image for the right eye and the image for the right eye is possible.

On the other hand, when the display control means executes the second control, parallax is not formed between the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's left eye. .. As a result, the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image (the line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the player's left eye and the non-stereoscopic image (the line of sight of the left eye) is the display position of the non-stereoscopic image. It becomes a plane view state in agreement with. For example, a predetermined (single) right-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image, or a predetermined (single) left-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image.

In the gaming machine provided with the display control means capable of switching between the state in which the first control is being executed and the state in which the second control is being executed, during the execution period of the division effect (or the division effect). During the fluctuation period based on the accompanying fluctuation pattern), the second control may be executed without executing the first control. For example, during the execution period (period from T2 to T15) of the split effect shown in FIGS. 10-14 or 10-23, the second control is executed without executing the first control, and the battle effect image after the end of the split effect. (For example, the image shown in FIG. 10-19 (13) or FIG. 10-24 (13)) is switched from the second control to the first control (in a state where stereoscopic viewing is possible). You may.

If the first control is performed while the split effect is being executed to enable stereoscopic viewing, both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are not given a sense of discomfort to the player. The image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) must be prepared in advance so as to generate a fusion image having an appropriate depth in the back direction (Z-axis direction) of the screen when viewed from the player. It disappears. In the present embodiment, by not executing the first control that enables stereoscopic viewing when the divided effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the effect data to be prepared from being excessively increased.

(Details of display control unit)
Next, the configuration for executing the division effect shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 27TM] will be described in detail. FIG. 10-25 is a configuration diagram showing the display control unit 123. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP (Video Display Processor) 150 is used when the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from the CG ROM (Character Generator ROM) 160. Reads necessary image data from the CGROM 160 via the CG bus interface 1530 and outputs it to the decoder 1550. Image data encoded (data compressed) by the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) method or the like is stored in the CGROM 160. The decoder 1550 decompresses the image data read from the CGROM 160, and writes the decompressed image data into the drawing material data RAM 1560.

The drawing circuit 1510 uses the image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying an image of one frame on the image display device 5, and creates frame image data in the drawing area of the VRAM (Video RAM) 170. Write. In this embodiment, if necessary, an object to be displayed formed by a set of polygons is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and the object is converted into a virtual screen by rendering processing. Frame image data corresponding to the image obtained by projection is generated. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals based on the frame image data in the drawing area to the image display device 5. The image display device 5 displays, for example, a screen by a dot matrix method that drives a large number of pixels.

The VDP1500 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). Further, the CGROM 160 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured by using.

Next, a display mode of the effect image using the three-dimensional object image will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-26 to 10-30. As shown in FIGS. 10-26, when drawing an object image, the VDP1500 in the display control unit 123 sets the object OB to be displayed formed by a set of polygons in virtual three dimensions (x, y, z). When it is placed in space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and it is assumed that the object is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint EY (for example, viewpoint EY0) by rendering processing, a position separated from the viewpoint EY by a predetermined distance. The image IM obtained by projecting onto the virtual screen SC arranged in the above is obtained by arithmetic processing, and the image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the drive circuit 180 (see FIG. 10-25). In this embodiment, the image IM projected on the virtual screen SC is drawn by perspective projection.

In the following description, the x-axis is the axis in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction of the screen), the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the right of the screen is the positive direction, and from the origin (0,0,0). It is assumed that the direction to the left of the screen is the negative direction. Further, the y-axis is an axis in the vertical direction (vertical direction of the screen), the direction from the origin (0,0,0) toward the top of the screen is the positive direction, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the bottom of the screen. It is assumed that the direction of travel is negative. Further, the z-axis is an axis in the vertical direction (screen depth direction) orthogonal to the screen, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) toward the back of the screen is the positive direction, and the origin (0,0,0). It is assumed that the direction from to the front of the screen is the negative direction.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-27, the VDP1500 of the display control unit 123 is based on the effect image EG (an example of an image imitating the effect display area 27TM005A) in which the variable display of the effect symbol is executed. Then, by performing texture mapping on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (Fig. 10-27 (1)), the xy plane of the object OB can be obtained. The production image EG is synthesized (mapped). As a result, the xy plane of the object OB and the effect image EG are integrated in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (FIG. 10-27 (2)). By executing the rendering process for the object OB, the same rendering process is executed for the effect image EG.

The drawing of the object image when executing the variable display of the effect symbol is executed when the display control unit 123 is controlled according to the contents of the process data. The effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the content of the process data. The display control unit 123 includes information for designating the data of the object OB to be displayed at that timing. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 selects the data of the CGROM 160 or the object OB to be displayed according to the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520. Here, the data of the object OB includes the position information of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the coordinate information of the polygons forming the object OB, the coordinate information of the texture, and the like. The data of the selected object OB to be displayed is stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560. Then, information (effect designation information) indicating which effect the data of the object OB corresponds to is added to the data of the selected object OB to be displayed. Based on this effect designation information, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the image data of the selected display target object OB is an object for the effect image, an object for other backgrounds, and the like, and draws a circuit. Drawing of the object OB is performed using 1510.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-27, a set of decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right is variably displayed in the effect image EG synthesized on the xy plane of the object OB. Then, by changing (transforming or moving) the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the effect image EG in which the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed is also changed (transformed or moved). Will be done. As a result, the aspect of the drawn object image (for example, the length and angle of the displayed straight line) changes, and the aspect of the displayed decorative pattern (for example, the size and vertical and horizontal directions of the displayed decorative pattern) changes accordingly. Ratio, etc.) also changes.

FIG. 10-28 shows an example in which the position of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by rotating the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space with the y-axis as the rotation axis. FIG. 10-28 (A) is a diagram showing an initial state when a rectangular parallelepiped object OB having an xy plane is combined with an effect image EG in a virtual three-dimensional space. Further, FIG. 10-28 (B1) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the synthesis process is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis. Further, FIG. 10-28 (B2) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the synthesis process is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-29, when drawing the object image, the viewpoint corresponding to the object OB (for example, the viewpoint EY0) is set. The viewpoint EY0 in this example is set at a position relative to the xy plane in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, and the line of sight is set so as to be parallel to the z-axis. That is, a viewpoint EY0 similar to the viewpoint when the player views the screen of the image display device 5 is set.

The viewpoint EY0 shown in the example of FIG. 10-29 is the midpoint (p, q is a real number] when the coordinates of the object OB in the initial state shown in FIG. 28 (A) with respect to the xy plane are (p, q) [p, q are real numbers]. It is located at o / 2, p / 2), and is located at a predetermined distance | r | [r is a real number, r <0] away from the z-axis. That is, the viewpoint EY0 corresponding to the object OB in this example is located at a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space.

The object OB is drawn as an image obtained by perspective projection on the virtual screen SC when it is assumed that the object OB is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. Therefore, when the object OB after the compositing process is in the initial state, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), an image in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols have the same size is displayed. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the left decorative pattern has the largest size and middle size. The image in which the decorative pattern is the second largest size and the right decorative pattern is the smallest size is displayed. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, the right decorative pattern has the largest size and middle as shown in FIG. 28 (B2). The image in which the decorative pattern is the second largest size and the left decorative pattern is the smallest size is displayed.

In this way, the VDP1500 in the display control unit 123 performs texture mapping based on the effect image EG on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space as a synthesis process, and performs the texture mapping on the object OB. By changing (transforming or moving), an image when the three-dimensional object OB after the change (after deformation or movement) is viewed from the viewpoint EY0 is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM. As a result, the generated image IM naturally reflects the display mode after the change (deformation or movement) of the effect image EG mapped to the object OB. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control unit 123 as compared with the case where the display mode of the effect image EG is sequentially calculated based only on the data of the effect image EG that is not associated with the data of the object OB. It becomes.

In the example of FIGS. 10-29, the viewpoint EY0 is a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional space. Not limited to such a form, the position of the viewpoint to be set may be different according to the game state, the fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect, the jackpot expectation, and the like. Further, when arranging a plurality of object OBs in the virtual three-dimensional space, a corresponding viewpoint may be set for each object OB. For example, as shown below, when two objects OB1 and OB2 are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the viewpoint EY1 corresponding to the object OB1 and the viewpoint EY2 corresponding to the object OB2 are set, and the object OB1 is set. For, the image obtained when viewed from the viewpoint EY1 may be drawn, and for the object OB2, the image obtained when viewed from the viewpoint EY2 may be drawn.

For example, when the above-mentioned division effect is executed, the VDP1500 displays the effect image EG1 on which the first decorative symbol is displayed on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB1 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The first synthesis process for synthesizing is executed. Then, the object OB1 on which the first synthesis process is executed is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28 (B2)), and the rotated object OB1 is viewed as the viewpoint EY1. The image viewed from the front is drawn by fluoroscopic projection to generate the image IM1 (the image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100). Further, the VDP1500 executes a second composition process of synthesizing the effect image EG2 on which the second decorative pattern is displayed on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB2 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. .. Then, the object OB2 on which the second synthesis process is executed is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28 (B1)), and the rotated object OB2 is viewed as the viewpoint EY2. An image IM2 (an image corresponding to the second production image 27TM200) is generated by drawing an image when viewed from above by fluoroscopic projection.

Then, the VDP1500 executes display control in which the image IM1 is superimposed and displayed on the right portion of the background image and the image IM2 is superimposed and displayed on the left portion of the background image, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, the background The composite image including the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 superimposed on the image is displayed as the effect image of the divided effect.

Here, when the image of the changed (after rotation) object OB1 viewed from the viewpoint EY1 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1, the viewpoint EY1 is created in virtual three dimensions (x, y, z). Fixed points in space (p1, q1, r1) [p1, q1, r1 are real numbers, r1 <0, and by locating them at | r | <| r1 |], when viewed from a position farther than the viewpoint EY0. The image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1 (∵ | r | <| r1 |). As a result, the image IM1 (the image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, which is a smaller area than the effect display area 27TM005A.

Similarly, when the image of the changed (after rotation) object OB2 viewed from the viewpoint EY2 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM2, the viewpoint EY2 is virtual three-dimensionally (x, y, z). Fixed points in space (p2, q2, r2) [p2, q2, r2 are real numbers, r2 <0, and by locating them at | r | <| r2 |], when viewed from a position farther than the viewpoint EY0. The image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM2 (∵ | r | <| r2 |). As a result, the image IM2 (the image corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200) is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, which is an area smaller than the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the above example of the division effect, a plurality of viewpoints (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) corresponding to each of a plurality of objects (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) are arranged and drawn in a virtual three-dimensional space. In this example, a drawing mode of a multi-viewpoint drawing mode for drawing an image obtained when viewed from two viewpoints EY1 and EY2) is adopted, but a plurality of objects (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) are adopted. ) May be adopted as a drawing mode of a one-viewpoint drawing mode in which an image obtained when viewed from a common viewpoint EY1'is drawn.

In the present embodiment, the effect image EG corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is xy on the z-axis negative direction side (front side of the screen) of the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. When the compositing process (texture mapping) for compositing on a plane is executed, the object OB for which the compositing process is executed is changed (transformed or moved), and the object OB after the change (deformed or moved) is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. An example is shown in which the image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM, but the background image is not limited to such a form, and an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is shown. Performs a composition process (texture mapping) to synthesize to the xy plane on the positive direction side of the z-axis (back side of the screen), changes (transforms or moves) the object OB on which the composition process is executed, and after the change (transformation or movement). The image IM3 may be generated by drawing an image of the object OB (after movement) viewed from the viewpoint EY3 by perspective projection.

In this way, by changing (transforming or moving) the object OB in the state where the background image is combined with the object OB, the aspect of the background image displayed on the entire screen of the effect display area 27TM005A of the image display device 5 can be obtained. It becomes possible to execute a changing shake vision effect. The shake vision effect described above has not only the effect of changing the mode of the background image synthesized on the object OB, but also the effect of changing the mode of the effect image EG synthesized on the same object OB. This shake vision effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that the effect being executed ends, or may be executed as an effect when the execution period of the effect being executed is longer than a predetermined period, and is a big hit. It may be executed as a chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is high.

In the above embodiment, the VDP1500 of the display control unit 123 of the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command serves as the second effect image 27TM200 as a predetermined movie (movie A (short)) corresponding to the designated variation pattern. , Movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)) will be played. Here, with respect to the second effect image 27TM200, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the original image (for example, the above IM2) for forming the second effect image 27TM200 is created in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be possible to display the image without performing the composition process of synthesizing it with the three-dimensional object OB2 arranged in.

For example, the first movie in which the right decorative symbol is displayed in the largest size, the middle decorative symbol in the second largest size, and the left decorative symbol in the smallest size, and the left decorative symbol in the largest size and the middle decorative symbol in the second size. A second movie in which a large size and a right decorative pattern are displayed in the smallest size is prepared in advance (stored in the ROM of the effect control board in association with the fluctuation pattern). Then, when the divided effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed and displayed on the right portion of the background image, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed. When the first movie is played within the range and the divided effect based on the effect control of the second pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed and displayed on the left portion of the background image. The second movie is reproduced within the range of the second production image frame 27TM210.

In this way, the second production image 27TM200 is displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be displayable. Further, the first effect image 27TM100 can also be displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. May be. Further, within the variable display period accompanied by the split effect (or within the split effect period), the period during which the display control for generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is executed is executed. , A predetermined effect image EG (for example, a movie image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern) is superimposed and displayed on a background image without generating an image based on an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The period during which the display control is executed may be switched.

In addition to moving (rotating) the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z), the object OB may be deformed. For example, the rectangular parallelepiped object may be transformed into a cube by changing the coordinates of the vertices of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z). Further, the rectangular parallelepiped object OB is divided into two rectangular parallelepiped objects OB, and an image corresponding to the first effect image frame 27T110 is synthesized in one rectangular parallelepiped object OB after the division, and the other rectangular parallelepiped after the division is combined. An image corresponding to the second effect image frame 27TM210 may be combined with the object OB.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM), and is a three-dimensional object (a three-dimensional object (image display device 1). An object OB) is placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) viewed from a specific viewpoint is drawn by perspective projection to produce an effect. An image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) for generating an image (image IM) is provided, and the image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) is an effect display of the image display device (image display device 5). A predetermined image (effect image EG) imitating an area (effect display area 27TM005A) is associated with a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space). A predetermined process (synthesis process) is performed, the three-dimensional object (object OB) on which the predetermined process (synthesis process) is performed is changed (transformed or moved), and the three-dimensional object after the change is changed to a specific viewpoint (viewpoint). An image viewed from EY0) is drawn by fluoroscopic projection to generate an effect image (image IM), and a specific effect (for example, SP reach A or SP reach B) to display a moving image to which a character image is added is displayed. A production execution means (for example, a microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control) that can execute the reach effect of the image, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image (for example, a storage area 91AKM11), and data related to a character image are stored. A second storage area (for example, a storage area 91AKM13, etc.), a moving image control means for controlling the display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.), and the above. A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of a character image using the data in the second storage area is provided, and the data in the second storage area is a first component. The character includes data related to a plurality of character image components including (for example, a text image specified by text image designation information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information). The image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to the moving image (see, for example, FIG. 16-7). Can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. In addition, appropriate display control becomes possible.

That is, the image generation means performs a predetermined process of associating a predetermined image imitating the effect display area of the image display device with a three-dimensional object arranged in the virtual space, and the three-dimensional process in which the predetermined process is performed. The interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area by changing the object and drawing the image when the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint by perspective projection to generate the effect image. By changing the first component and the second component in the display period of the character image added to one moving image by the character image control means, the control burden of displaying the moving image is increased. Appropriate display control can be performed by preventing the increase and difficulty in recognizing the character image as much as possible. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine having an interesting effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area so that the displayed character image can be easily recognized when installed in the game hall.

Further, as an example of the form of a game machine that can improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area and can control the appropriate display, a game machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko). An effect execution means (for example, an effect control microprocessor) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added by a game machine 1 or the like). A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data related to moving images, a second storage area for storing data related to character images (for example, storage area 91AKM13), and the first storage area. A moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) that controls the display of a moving image using the data of the above, and a character image control that controls the display of a character image using the data of the second storage area. A means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) is provided, and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image designated by the text image designation information) and a second component. The character image control means includes data related to a plurality of character image components including (for example, a display style set by text display setting information), and the character image control means is used in a display period of the character image added to one moving image. A game machine in which the first component and the second component can be changed (see, for example, FIG. 16-7) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Basic explanation that is a prerequisite for the feature part of this embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13, among the basic configurations and controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is a premise of the feature portion described later, the points different from those of FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above will be described. .. Except for these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is the premise of the feature portion is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. The same is true.

FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine, and instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the effect control board 12 via the LED control board 14, lamp control is performed. The main difference from FIG. 2 is that the game effect lamp 909 is connected via the substrate 9014. Further, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at a place where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 is configured to include the LED.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to FIG. 3 described above receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the value is for the amusement park side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

14-1 (A) and 14-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 14-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 14-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one in which the first special figure and the second special figure use individual display result judgment tables, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Depending on each set value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is "small hit" regardless of the variable special map. The probability that it is determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

14-2 to 14-5 show a numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 14-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 14-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state. FIG. 14-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 14-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numerical values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is ". It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 14-4, in the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numerical values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is ". It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 14-5, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 14-1 indicates the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) and the probability of becoming a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 14-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (powered off) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, Depending on the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are lit from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in the state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Perform processing according to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear process, the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It is also possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later) of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may be executed.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is being changed and the power is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 14-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1020. It suffices to judge whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the display result determination table, the jackpot determination is performed using the hit determination value of 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, the value of the random number value MR1 is set. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It suffices to judge whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice as large). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot when it is 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature 60AK)
In the feature unit 60AK, the number of times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effect is an effect in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are given when a player's movement is detected, such as a push button 31B pressing operation. The operation effects of the feature unit 60AK include a notice effect for notifying that the jackpot game state will be controlled, a value notification effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled to a probabilistic state, and a pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value in is included as a feasible effect.

FIG. 15-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop symbol is a definite decorative symbol as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is a variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable indicated by the variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on the variable display content such as the display result of the display. The variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting process of the special symbol process process. The variable display contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the display result of the variable display are "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", "super reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability (probability)" It suffices to include "big hit)". When the variable display content is any of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the variable display content is either "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is also collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" and the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it is also collectively called that the variable display content is "big hit".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)", the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "normal", and the variable display content is "super reach (loss)". In the case of "missing)", the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "super". When the variable display content is "non-probable change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the big hit type corresponds to "non-probable change", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state is shortened. It becomes a state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the big hit type corresponds to "probability change", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state is the probable change state. Become. When the game state becomes a probabilistic state, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" increases, and it becomes easier to control the big hit game state as an advantageous state, so that the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value that is advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop symbol is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)". To. In this case, it is confirmed by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like and referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Among the decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to to perform the confirmation decoration. Of the symbols, the right-determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the confirmation decoration is performed by referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Among the symbols, the middle-fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop symbol is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right" when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". To. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left-right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the left-right confirmed symbol is determined by referring to the left-right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. Among the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Further, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like and referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the final decorative symbol is determined. Of these, the middle fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

The final stop symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)". It is determined that they have the same (matching) decorative pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot confirmation symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 It suffices to determine the decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may be broken. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognize that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. It should be noted that, after the decorative symbol is re-variated in the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined, the operation effect determination process is executed (step 60AKS012). The operation effect determination process determines and sets for executing the operation effect and the number-of-times notification effect. Then, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 60AKS013). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, an operation effect control pattern, and other notice effect control patterns. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in response to the determination result by the operation effect determination process in step 60AKS012. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the operation effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. (Step 60AKS014). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 60AKS015). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 60AKS013 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step 60AKS016). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 15-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting the execution of the operation effect. For example, when the reach effect of the SP reach, which is the super reach, is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the effect permission condition may be satisfied. Further, it may be one of the production permission conditions that it is a high-probability high-base state in the probable change state. As described above, when the reach effect of the SP reach is executed in the high accuracy and high base state, the effect permission condition may be satisfied.

In the feature unit 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as a reach effect of super reach. Each reach effect may include an effect in which the effect modes are different from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of executing the reach effect of the super reach is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of the normal reach. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach B is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach A. When the display result of the variable display is "missing", the ratio of executing the reach effect of the normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of the super reach. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach A is higher than the ratio of executing the reach effect of SP reach B. Due to the execution ratio of the reach effect, the reach effect of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach effect of SP reach A was executed among the reach effects of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B. In some cases, the jackpot expectation is high.

If the effect permission condition is not satisfied in step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence / absence and the number of operation effects are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is executed by referring to the operation effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for the operation effect execution decision. It suffices to decide whether or not there is, and the number of executions when executing. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the operation effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS022, the presence / absence and the number of times of the operation effect are set to "no execution" in which the operation effect is not executed, "execution 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10. It is decided to be one of "10 times execution".

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the operation effect is not executed "no execution" (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "no execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "big hit" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the number of suggested setting times is determined (step 60AKS025). The number of setting suggestion indicates the number of operation effects executed as the setting suggestion effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the set suggestion count is determined by referring to the set suggestion count determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the set suggestion count. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the set suggested number of times may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS025, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the number of suggested settings is determined to be 0. When the jackpot type is "probability change", it depends on whether the operation effect is executed 5 times, "5 times" or 10 times, "10 times". Therefore, the number of suggested settings is determined at different rates.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The setting suggestion pattern is based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern, and by referring to the setting suggestion pattern determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121, etc., for each execution number of operation effects, Of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns, one of the setting suggestion patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (Step 60AKS026; Yes), or after the setting suggestion pattern is determined in step 60AKS027, the number of value notifications is determined (step 60AKS028). The value notification number of times indicates the number of operation effects executed as the value notification effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, the number of value notifications is determined by referring to the value notification number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the number of value notifications. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of value notifications may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 60AKS028, the value is different depending on whether the operation effect is executed 5 times in the case of "5 times execution" or 10 times in the case of "10 times execution". The number of notifications is determined.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of value notification patterns for each number of times the operation effect is executed, based on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change". It should be done.

When it is determined in step 60AKS024 that the display result of the variable display is not a "big hit" (step 60AKS024; No), when the determination result in step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of advance notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of times of the advance notice effect indicates the number of times of the operation effect executed as the advance notice effect among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed. Therefore, the number of times the operation effect is executed may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times the operation effect is executed, which is obtained by subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number, may be set as the advance notice effect number. After step 60AKS031, the advance notice effect pattern is determined (step 60AKS032), and then the operation effect determination process is terminated. The advance notice effect pattern is determined for each operation effect by referring to the advance notice effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121 in advance based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the advance notice effect pattern. Of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns, one of the advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the advance notice effect pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 15-3 shows an example of determining the presence / absence and the number of operation effects in step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. In step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence / absence and the number of operation effects are determined at a ratio according to, for example, the reach effect content. The content of the reach effect is determined according to the variable pattern and the display result of the variable display, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". It suffices to include "B (loss)". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (loss)" or "SP reach B (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the reach effect content is either "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", the reach effect of SP reach A is executed as the reach effect of super reach. When the reach effect content is either "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", the reach effect of SP reach B is executed as the reach effect of super reach.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of times of executing the operation effect is 5 times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "missing". It is determined to be "5 times execution" or "10 times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)" or "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "no execution" without executing the operation effect is 20/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state is increased as compared with the case where the operation effect is not executed, and the jackpot expectation is higher.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-3, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times at a higher rate than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 40/100. On the other hand, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 60/100. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 10/100. On the other hand, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of "10 times execution" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 is 20/100. Among the reach effects of Super Reach, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect of SP Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of SP Reach A is executed. Therefore, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of the reach effect of SP reach B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the reach effect of SP reach A, is increased, and the game The expectation of the person is effectively raised. Further, as the number of times the operation effect is executed increases, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state increases, and the jackpot expectation level increases.

FIG. 15-4 shows an example of determining the number of suggested setting times by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 15-4 (A) shows an example of determining the number of suggested setting times in the case of "execution 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5. FIG. 15-4 (B) shows an example of determining the number of suggested setting times in the case of “10 times execution” in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10. In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the number of suggested settings is determined at a rate according to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot type includes "non-probability change" when it is not controlled to the probability change state and "probability change" when it is controlled to the probability change state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the probabilistic state, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the probabilistic state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state. An advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the setting suggestion effect is determined to be feasible at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times", if the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the determination ratio for setting the suggested number of settings to 0 is 100/100, which is set. The suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "probability change", the number of suggested setting can be determined to be other than 0 at a ratio according to the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times". More specifically, in the case of "execution 5 times", if the jackpot type is "probability change", the decision ratio for setting the suggested number of settings to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio for setting the number of suggested settings to 1 is 1. It is 30/100. In the case of "10 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability change", the decision ratio for setting the suggested number of settings to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio for setting the number of suggested settings to 1 is 15/100. The decision ratio with the set suggestion count of 2 is 20/100, the decision ratio with the set suggestion count of 3 is 25/100, and the decision ratio with the set suggestion count of 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed is increased with the number of setting suggestion times other than 0. Further, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4 which is the setting suggestion number which is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions can be made. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so that the jackpot type has a higher advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". In the case of "probability change", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, among multiple types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed only in the case of "probability change", which is the most advantageous jackpot type. Become feasible. Of the multiple types of jackpot game states, within the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with high advantage, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. In the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "non-probability variation" of the jackpot type having a low advantage, a limit may be provided as a limit that the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type having a high advantage, it is possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability change" of the jackpot type with low advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a low rate. You may.

FIG. 15-5 shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. It is defined that the suggestion content and the corresponding character are different according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the set value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by the effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, the suggestion content is "high expectation of odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1 corresponding to the case where the setting value is odd and the expectation is high. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, the suggestion content is "high expectation of even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2, corresponding to the case where the setting value is an even number and the expectation is high. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, the suggestion content is "high expectation of high setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH3, corresponding to the case where the setting value is high setting (large value) and the expectation is high. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, the suggestion content is "the set value is confirmed to be 2 or more" and the corresponding character is the character CH4, corresponding to the case where the set value is confirmed to be 2 or more. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the suggestion content is "the highest set value is fixed" and the corresponding character is the character CH5, corresponding to the case where the set value is fixed at the highest 6. As described above, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value has the highest advantage for the player.

FIG. 15-6 shows an example of determining the setting suggestion pattern by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 15-6 (A) shows a determination example in the case of the final operation effect in the plurality of operation effects. 15-6 (B1) and 15-6 (B2) show a determination example in the case where the operation effect is other than the final inning in a plurality of operation effects, and FIG. 15-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern. It is a determination example when 60AKC4 is undecided as a use pattern, and FIG. 15-6 (B2) is a determination example when the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is determined as a use pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, a setting suggestion pattern to be used is determined at a ratio corresponding to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, in the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the determination ratio is 5/100 when the set value is 6, and the determination ratio is 0/100 in other cases. It becomes undecidable. Therefore, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 that suggests that the setting value has the highest advantage for the player is the final operation effect. Is executed at a predetermined ratio, and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final round. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher ratio than the first timing, which is advantageous for the player. The setting suggestion effect suggesting that is the highest setting value can be executed.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-6, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the set value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect. Further, if the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is undecided in response to the operation effect other than the final round, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the set value is 2 or more. On the other hand, if the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined in response to the operation effect other than the final round, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and the determination cannot be made. .. Therefore, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once as one of the operation effects at a predetermined ratio, and is executed again or repeatedly in the same manner. Prevent being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not yet executed. It becomes feasible.

On the other hand, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range in which the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. There is a limit as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect that becomes the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times is executed. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined ratio, but in the range where the setting suggestion effect is executed other than the final round, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed. There is a limitation as a limitation. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined ratio within the range of being executed as one setting suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it cannot be executed within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect a plurality of times. When the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the same mode is used in the range of the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5. On the other hand, in the range of the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion pattern is not executed in the same manner.

FIG. 15-7 shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Of these, FIG. 15-7 (A) shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in the case of "5 times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 5 times. FIG. 15-7 (B) shows an example of determining the number of value notifications in the case of "10 times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of value notifications is determined at a ratio corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the number of suggested settings. The number of suggested setting is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "5 times", and 0 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "10 times". It is determined to be one of ~ 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-7, the number of value notifications is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the number of suggested settings is other than 0. For example, in the case of "execution 5 times", if the number of suggested settings is 1, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 100/100, and one value notification effect is always executed. In the case of "execution 10 times", if the number of suggested settings is other than 0 (any of 1 to 4), the number of value notifications is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined ratio. More specifically, in the case of "execution 10 times", if the number of suggested settings is other than 0, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 55/100, and the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 2 is 55. It is 20/100, the determination ratio with the number of value notifications being 3 is 15/100, and the determination ratio with the number of value notifications being 4 is 10/100. Therefore, when the value notification effect notifies whether or not a game value advantageous to the player is given, the setting suggestion effect can suggest the set value. The setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio when it is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type having a high advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot game states. In this case, the value notification effect notifies that the player is given an advantageous game value, and the setting suggestion effect can suggest the set value. As a result, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, but is executed in the range that the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that it is not done. It should be noted that the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed at a low rate. There may be a limit as a limit to be feasible with.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-7, the value notification number is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the setting suggestion number is 0. For example, in the case of "execution 5 times", if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 70/100, and the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 30/100. is there. In the case of "10 times execution", if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the determination ratio for setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100. The decision rate with the number of value notifications being 2 is 20/100, the decision rate with the number of value notifications being 3 is 25/100, and the decision rate with the number of value notifications being 4 is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the display result of the variable display is "big hit" after the execution of the operation effect is completed without executing the operation effect that becomes the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect. ”Can be provided. Therefore, even if the number of times the operation effect is executed reaches the number of times notified by the number notification effect during the execution of the variable display and the execution of the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display may be a "big hit". Is left behind, so it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being impaired by the end of the operation effect.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-7, the number of value notifications can be determined to be other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "execution 5 times" and the case of "execution 10 times". Then, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of the value notification effect being executed may be increased by setting the number of times of value notification to other than 0. For example, in the case of "execution 5 times", the ratio in which the number of suggested setting is determined to be 0 is higher than the ratio in which the number of suggested settings is determined to be 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "execution 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times determined to be other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion times determined to be 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "execution 5 times", in step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the ratio of the number of value notifications determined to be 0 is higher than the ratio of the number of value notifications determined to be 1 other than 0. high. In the case of "execution 10 times", in step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, even if the number of setting suggestions is 0, the ratio of the value notification number determined to other than 0 is higher than the ratio of the value notification number determined to 0. .. With such a setting, in the case of "10 times execution" in which the operation effect is executed more times than "5 times execution", the ratio that the value notification number is determined to be other than 0 becomes high, and the value notification effect is executed. The rate of being done is increased. Further, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it can be determined to be one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value notifications that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notifications can be made. It suffices to increase the rate at which the production is executed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "execution 5 times", both the number of setting suggestion and the number of value notification are determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect being executed is high. Therefore, in the case of "10 times execution", both the setting suggestion number and the value notification number are determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect being executed increases. In this way, as the number of times the operation effect is executed increases, the ratio of the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect executed may increase. Further, when the number of times of execution of the operation effect is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, the player's expectation for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect can be changed according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 15-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 60AK. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. It may be determined that the lapse has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display in-effect processing shown in FIG. 15-8, it is determined whether or not the number-of-times notification effect period is reached (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the number-of-times notification effect period is reached (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By controlling step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect of performing the notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

When it is determined in step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after the control of step 60AKS043 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The advance notice effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, advance notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The advance notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be predetermined so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that the advance notice effect period is reached (step 60AKS044; Yes), control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step 60AKS045). By controlling step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a notice effect.

When it is determined in step 60AKS044 that it is not the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; No), or after the control of step 60AKS045 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step 60AKS046). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (such as the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The reach effect period may be set to be later than the notice effect period, or may be set to include at least a part of the notice effect period. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 60AKS046; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By controlling step 60AKS047, the reach effect can be executed.

When it is determined in step 60AKS046 that it is not the reach effect period (step 60AKS046; No), or after the control of step 60AKS047 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (such as the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The jackpot notification period may be predetermined so as to be later than the reach production period. When it is determined that the jackpot notification period is reached (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute the jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By controlling step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state is controlled during a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is not the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; No), or after the control of step 60AKS049 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set to include at least a part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that the value notification effect period is reached (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By controlling step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a value notification effect.

When it is determined in step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after the control of step 60AKS051 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the big hit medium effect control pattern. The setting suggestion effect period may be set to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that the setting suggestion effect period is reached (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By controlling step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect. When it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), or after the control of step 60AKS053 is performed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, other control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed (step 60AKS054), and then the variable display effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), the display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 15-9 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects with respect to the feature unit 60AK. Of these, FIG. 15-9 (A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 15-9 (B) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the operation-related effects including the number-of-times notification effect and the operation effect. When the variable display is started at the timing T0, the number-of-times notification effect period is reached. In the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, the advance notice effect period begins. During the advance notice effect period, the operation effect to be the advance notice effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects such as the first advance notice, the second advance notice, and so on is executed in order. .. The notice effect period is not only the period during which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. A part may be included in the period. By executing the operation effect that becomes the advance notice effect during the advance notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is "big hit" based on the detection of the player's movement such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B. The effect of notifying that it will be possible becomes feasible.

In the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, when the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the jackpot notification is executed at the timing T2. In the variable display during effect processing, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that the jackpot notification period is reached, the jackpot notification effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS049. At this time, the value notification production period is set. During the value notification effect period, the operation effect that is the value notification effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of value notification effects is executed, each value notification effect included in the plurality of value notification effects, such as the first notification, the second notification, and so on, is sequentially performed. Will be executed. By executing the operation effect that becomes the value notification effect during the value notification effect period, the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is based on the detection of the player's movement such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B. It becomes possible to execute an effect of notifying whether or not it is controlled by.

Subsequently, the special time notification is executed at the timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period is set. During the setting suggestion effect period, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed by the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of setting suggestion effects is executed, each setting suggestion effect included in the multiple setting suggestion effects such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, and so on is sequentially performed. Will be executed. Regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the player's movement such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect during the setting suggestion effect period. The effect of making a suggestion becomes feasible. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the jackpot starts, and the control of the jackpot game state is started.

In this way, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the number notification effect period, the advance notice effect period, the value notification effect period, and the setting suggestion effect period can be provided. In the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed, in which the notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed is performed. During the notice effect period, an operation effect that is a notice effect for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. In the value notification effect period, an operation effect that is a value notification effect for notifying whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is executed. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. When the number of value notifications is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of setting suggestions is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in a predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in a specific period in which the operation effect can be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period. The value notification effect period starts when the jackpot notification is performed at the timing T2. The jackpot notification by the jackpot notification effect makes it possible to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled in a predetermined period. The setting suggestion effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period when the big hit notification is performed at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the number of setting suggestions is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Determined to be feasible. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the number of setting suggestions is other than 0, the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, and the value notification effect is determined to be executable. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability variation" of the jackpot type having a high advantage. Elapsed of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state with a high advantage is performed by the value notification effect, compared to the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state with a low advantage. In a specific period later, the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode.

Even if the operation effects that are the advance notice effect and the value notification effect can be executed in the predetermined period, if these operation effects are completed, it becomes difficult to raise the expectation of the player after the elapse of the predetermined period. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period, even after the operation effect which is the advance notice effect or the value notification effect is completed. , It is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0 only when the jackpot type is "probability change", and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be feasible. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the number of setting suggestions is other than 0, the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, and the value notification effect is determined to be executable. Therefore, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type "probability change" having the highest advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation". , The setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period only when the notification controlled to the jackpot game state having the highest advantage is performed by the value notification effect. Become.

In general, it becomes difficult to further raise the expectation of the player after the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage is performed. On the other hand, the present invention provides a case where the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode and the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period. Even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

15-10 and 15-11 show an execution example of the operation effect. In this execution example, the number of times the operation effect is executed is determined to be "10 times execution", and the number of times of value notification and the number of times of suggestion of setting are both determined to be 2. Therefore, after the operation effect serving as the advance notice effect is executed six times, the advance notice effect period ends and the jackpot notification is performed. FIG. 15-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD1 in the case where the big hit notification is executed by the big hit notification effect. At this time, a jackpot notification effect including the display of a message such as "battle victory!" And the display of an effect image showing the character is executed. Further, as a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", a normal symbol indicating the number "6" is displayed. As the remaining number of times the operation effect is executed, an effect image indicating "the number of remaining operations 4 times" is also displayed. When a decorative symbol of a non-probability jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to "non-probability variation", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variation state. , Give to the player.

FIG. 15-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message suggesting 4 which is the remaining number of operation effects is displayed as the number of times the operation effect that is the value notification effect can be executed. FIG. 15-10 (C) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's operation such as the pressing operation on the push button 31B is promoted. FIG. 15-10 (D) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD4 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the player's action of pressing the push button 31B, the notification that the jackpot type is "probability change" is not performed, so that the probability change state is obtained after the end of the jackpot game state. A failure notification effect that gives the impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations 3 times" is displayed.

FIG. 15-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed, and the player's action such as a pressing operation on the push button 31B is promoted. FIG. 15-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 6 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the player's action of pressing the push button 31B, the notification that the jackpot type is "probability change" is performed, so that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect is executed to notify that the control is performed. In addition, as a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "middle" and "right", the normal symbol indicating the number "6" is changed to the probabilistic symbol indicating the number "7". It is changed and displayed. When a decorative symbol of a probability variation jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation symbol is displayed, the player can control the jackpot type to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "probability variation" and control the probability variation state. Becomes recognizable. In addition, as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations 2 times" is displayed.

FIG. 15-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with the notification of the special time, a message is displayed to notify the remaining number of operation effects of 2 as the number of times the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed.

FIG. 15-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image indicating the push button 31B together with the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is promoted. FIG. 15-11 (B) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 9 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, an effect image showing the corresponding character CH2 is displayed. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5, which are the corresponding characters of the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage according to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be obtained. , The player becomes recognizable.

FIG. 15-11 (C) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the player displays an effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and an effect image showing the push button 31B, and presses the push button 31B. The operation of is prompted. FIG. 15-11 (D) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 11 when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, an effect image showing the corresponding character CH4 is displayed. FIG. 15-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 15-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 60 AKD 13 in the case where the decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination, which is the final decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variable display. After that, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the control of the big hit game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 15-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the setting suggestion effect is performed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probability variation". May be determined to be feasible. In the determination example shown in FIG. 15-4, the number of suggested setting may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and the case where the jackpot type is "probability variation". In this way, if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than the "probability change" when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the jackpot type has a lower advantage than when the jackpot type is "probability change". In the case of a certain "non-probability change", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", which is the least advantageous jackpot type, and the operation effect is a setting suggestion effect. May be feasible. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages, it may be possible to control a jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is different, instead of the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation". For example, the jackpot type according to the number of rounds, such as "4R" where the number of rounds is 4, "6R" where the number of rounds is 6, "8R" where the number of rounds is 8, and "10R" where the number of rounds is 10. May be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can obtain increases, so that the player's advantage may increase. The value notification effect may be an effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can obtain according to the number of rounds. Even in such a case, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage by the value notification effect is generated according to the control to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage. When it is performed, the setting suggestion effect is set as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification controlled to the jackpot game state with low advantage is performed. It should be made feasible. In addition, among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the notification is controlled to the jackpot gaming state having the highest advantage by the value notification effect according to the control to the jackpot gaming state having the highest advantage. Only in the case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

On the other hand, among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the notification is controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a low advantage by the value notification effect according to the control to the jackpot gaming state having a low advantage. In this case, the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period at a higher rate than the case where the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage is performed. You may. Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state having the lowest advantage among the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, the value notification effect is used to notify the jackpot gaming state to be controlled to the lowest advantage. Only in the case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the operation production of the suggestion production mode.

In addition, the advantage of the player in a plurality of types of advantageous states may be different depending on whether or not an arbitrary game value is given and the content of the game value to be given. For example, when the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be different by changing the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time reduction state. Alternatively, when the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the player's advantage may be different by changing the jackpot probability in the probability change state. The advantage of the player may be different by changing the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled by the normal state. Further, the value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself, for example, the execution of the reach effect that becomes the super reach, the display of the effect image that becomes the premier character, and the premier music. Part or all of performing a particular effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code, may be included. The image showing the two-dimensional code may include information that enables the player to acquire predetermined digital contents by taking a picture with a terminal device (mobile terminal) possessed by the player. The value that can be imparted to the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include effect points that are different from those that perform a specific effect.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "execution 5 times" which is 5 times and the case of "execution 10 times" which is 10 times. It suffices if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is large, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number of times the operation effect is executed is small. In addition, when the number of times the operation effect is executed is large, it is possible to determine the number of setting suggestions that is not determined when the number of times the operation effect is executed is small, or the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects is increased. You may.

Instead of the determination example shown in FIG. 15-6, restrictions may be provided so that the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Further, regardless of whether or not it is the final operation effect and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at a common determination ratio, and then a predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is satisfied, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern to limit the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern from being executed. Alternatively, for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern may be repeatedly executed.

It may be possible to determine the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, as well as whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the number of setting suggestions is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the number of setting suggestions is small, and the definite notification that the set value is 6 may be easily executed. Alternatively, when the number of setting suggestions is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the number of setting suggestions is small, and it may be difficult to execute the definite notification that the set value is 6. ..

The setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined release condition is satisfied after being executed once. .. For example, in the period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, the release condition is not satisfied, and after the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by. When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the setting value has a high advantage for the player. , It is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game entertainment.

Instead of the setting suggestion effect, or when an operation effect that is a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggestion effect, the suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be performed. For example, as a plurality of advance notice effect patterns, a advance notice effect pattern in which the determination ratio differs depending on the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 or a advance notice effect pattern that can be determined only when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a specific value. It may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect pattern for notifying the message of "reliability 66%", and the determination rate of the advance notice effect pattern is increased. As described above, it suffices that the determination value in the advance notice effect pattern determination table is assigned to a plurality of advance notice effect patterns. By executing the operation effect that is the advance notice effect so that the suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the advance notice effect can be executed as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in the predetermined period before the specific period. It becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, the suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. By executing an operation effect that serves as a value notification effect so that a suggestion regarding a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the value notification effect is provided as an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a predetermined period prior to the specific period. It becomes feasible. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the operation production that gives notice and notification.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-2, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of value notifications may be determined and then the number of suggested settings may be determined. In this case, when the number of value notifications is determined to be other than 0, the number of setting suggestions can be determined, and when the number of value notifications is determined to be 0, the number of setting suggestions is not determined and the setting suggestion effect is produced. May not be executed. In this way, when it is notified whether or not the game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion effect can suggest the set value.

The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, an effect of suggesting whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate is executed so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. , The production can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

At least a part of the predetermined period, or a part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect as the advance notice effect may be executed, but the operation effect as the value notification effect or the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the value notification effect is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). Or an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect may be made feasible. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on the detection of the tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode is such that the player has a higher advantage than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. Good. For example, in the setting suggestion effect using the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, the setting suggestion is such that the determination ratio of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the determination ratio of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. The determination value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the movement by the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like, and may be, for example, a jog dial capable of a rotation operation, or a touch operation or a pressing operation like a touch panel. It may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting an arbitrary operation not limited to the instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of shooting a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that an arbitrary motion can be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the motion by the player may be any configuration that can detect the motion of the arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. Setting means such as CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of FIG. 14-13, which can be set to any of the values of, and game control means such as CPU 103 that can proceed with the game. Based on the detection of the player's movement, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, and 60AKS053 shown in FIG. The processing of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 15-8 is executed, for example, the operation effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 and the notification effect corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed can be executed. A notification effect execution means such as a CPU 120 for effect control is provided, and in the execution pattern of the operation effect by the operation effect execution means, the operation effect of the number of executions indicated by the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, a variable display. The first execution pattern, such as when the result is not a "big hit" or when the determination result of the set suggestion number is 0, and the operation effect a number of times less than the number of executions indicated by the notification effect are executed within a predetermined period. , The operation effect of the remaining number of executions is executed after the elapse of the predetermined period, for example, the second execution pattern such as the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the determination result of the set suggestion number is other than 0 is included. As shown in FIGS. 15-5, 15-6, and 15-9, for example, the motion effect executing means performs the motion effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period according to the suggestion effect mode for suggesting the setting of the setting means. It is feasible. As a result, the production can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

An advantageous notification means such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. 15-8, which can notify that the control to an advantageous state is performed in a predetermined period, is provided, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" in the process of step 60AKS024 shown in 15-2, and the part for executing the process of step 60AKS025 is notified by an advantageous notification means, a predetermined period of time is set. In a specific period after the lapse of time, it may be possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The advantageous states include a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" and a second advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "probable change" which is higher than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including the above, and the operation effect executing means is notified that it is controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4. May be able to execute the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode at a higher rate than when the advantage notification means is notified that the first advantageous state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The advantageous states include a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" and a second advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "probable change" which is higher than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the motion effect executing means is an advantageous notification means, for example, when the jackpot type "non-probable change" and "probable change" shown in FIG. 15-4 are exchanged. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state is performed by, it is suggested in a specific period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means is performed. It may be possible to execute the operation effect of the effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

As an advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states such that the degree of advantage for the player is different, for example, the jackpot type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change". For example, as shown in FIG. 15-4, it is possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period only when the advantage notification means notifies that the control is controlled to the most advantageous state. You may. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to expect the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The motion effect executing means performs an motion effect by any of a plurality of modes as the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode, for example, when the number of setting suggestions shown in FIG. 15-4 is determined to be one of 2 to 4. , It can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period, and restricts the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode from being executed by the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 15-2. A limiting means such as an effect control CPU 120 for determining a setting suggestion pattern at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-6 may be provided in the process of. As a result, the production can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

In a specific period after the elapse of a predetermined period, the motion effect executing means performs the motion effect of the suggestion effect mode at the first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion and later than the first timing, for example, the second suggestion. It can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of the above, and as shown in FIGS. 15-4 and 15-6, for example, an operation effect suggesting that the setting value has the highest advantage for the player. May be feasible at the second timing at a higher rate than at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the motion production of the suggestion production mode.

The motion effect executing means may be able to execute the motion effect that gives a notice that the motion effect is controlled to an advantageous state in a predetermined period according to the suggestion effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the game entertainment so as to pay attention to the motion production that gives the notice.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 16-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 16-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, thereby performing image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other decorations. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices, such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32, is integrated on one chip may be used. .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 are the effect control microprocessors. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, or the like, and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. I just need to be there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member 32 and the like. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be any non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses after the start time (timeout time) and a time-out occurs, a time-out signal is used as a time-out signal. Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 is reset, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric components according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK 124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 91AK 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK 125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 91AK 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK 125. The variable data read process for reading the variable data of the above, the reception process for the CPU 91AK131 to receive input of various signals from the outside, the transmission process for the CPU 91AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes are included. May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read the compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the character image data, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of them, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. The character image renderer 91AK145 is input with character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the character image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. Good. In the text image renderer 91AK146, text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 are input, and are written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the text image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, the data may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time the V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The voice processing circuit 91AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 16-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area for the effect control program and the like. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared by CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which a procedure for displaying the effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. I just need to be there. The image processing program may include a program that converts image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in a bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multi-encoded stream may be used. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and the display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which an arbitrary character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and a data file constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode or form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. is there. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into glyphs of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line and curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, and an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Anything that can recognize the unit of Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP 91AK 132 is used when executing the image processing program. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and a data file constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode and form for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 can be reproduced and output as the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses, unlike the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of the moving image display. Anything that does. The voice-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 14 may include table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the sound effects such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of a moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a conversion process of text image data according to a display mode including a display style and a display layout of the text image, and writes the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147 and stores it. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 16-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the reach effect content. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect of displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect of displaying the text image is executed may be partly or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined, for example.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 16-3, the moving image data is determined to be one of 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 according to the reach effect content, and is determined to be one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it is possible to determine in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 16-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 16-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 16-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 16-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a single text display period in which the text image designation information and the text display setting information are set in association with each other. For the text display period, a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display are specified for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the display content of the text image is highly relevant to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period will be used using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image was started. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may be different. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified by using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the information that identifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set as long as the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 16-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 16-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 16-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 16-5 (B) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image starts.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 16-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 16-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. The timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 16-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 16-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, a part of the first text display period is common to the second text display period, and a part of the other period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text from the timing T02 to the timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed may be different in the entire plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. Good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 16-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 16-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters contained in a text image, such as right-justified, centered, and left-justified. The textDecoration field allows you to set decorative displays that are added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 16-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 16-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 16-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 16-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed on. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and when the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed with the text display setting information 91AKA13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA02. On the other hand, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKA3, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed with the displayed display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03 It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. It may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by the information 91AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, a part of the text image can be changed to a display mode different from that of the other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 16-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 16-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. As a result, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display it. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Thereby, different text images can be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in accordance with the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display it. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image designation information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. The text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 16-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 16-4 (A2) display text in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed depending on the reach effect content or the like even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in data capacity and the increase in processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by, for example, the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed as follows. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 16-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods in accordance with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. In the reach effect of SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete against each other is performed. Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKAD11 shown in FIG. 16-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300, 30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. A typeface whose font family is classified into Gothic typeface called AA_gothic, font size is 48px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, and text image display color gradually changes from # FF0040 to # 4000FF. The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the font style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the font alignment is centered, and the font decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. Good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA02, for example, the origin coordinate is (250,600). ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 16-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified as Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal font, character placement is centered, and character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed, a part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 16-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "super hot" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is the normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for golden display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, etc. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. Compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings of this text image, including the origin coordinates, have been changed. In this way, when the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if 1 data is changed and displayed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may also be modified and displayed. For example, when the display color of the text image is changed to the gold color corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. I just need to be there. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field in, for example, the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration becomes the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 16-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is specified by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, a specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the player can easily recognize the effect content by adding the effect of the text image display using the text image data. Therefore, it becomes easy to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the outline is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. May cause problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images and execute them with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data increases and the processing load of the image data increases. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image of 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load can be increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. It is possible to add the used text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it possible to display, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high rate of becoming a "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 16-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing a line of "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As the display style of the text image common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface of DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 16-8 (A) shows a case where a text image of a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 16-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed by, for example, a gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 16-8 (C) shows a case where a text image of a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around the text image and display it by displaying the display color of or shadow, the boundary display by bevel or embossing, the layer style that adds brilliance, or a combination of some or all of them. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It is possible to enhance the impression of a person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 16-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is italic, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets each italic whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to the other part of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal font whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in arbitrary production execution, not limited to the situation where the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. As the first component and the second component related to the text image, any component may be changed with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying a text image in an enlarged or reduced manner, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. It suffices if any component that can be set with respect to the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, can be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 16-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, in the corresponding text display period, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image, the origin coordinates, the font family, and the like. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters such as cursive and cursive is multiplexed or compressed and encoded as a part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from the moving image data is decompressed. A text image of a specific aspect may be displayed by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as the outline font data and the vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when the amount of the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at a plurality of timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to a sound effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a musical piece or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be changeable at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , Rainbow display should be possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is changed from red to orange, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, in consideration of the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display color in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it is sufficient to return to red and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. Good. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates within the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not the player's specific motion is detected, or a plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. It may be changed to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operations of the V stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the rod, or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect of displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed. The ratio of image display effects is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectation is high, which is a setting value.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range in which the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. In addition, any effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the storage data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is a character image added to one moving image. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-7. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 16-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 16-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates and the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the storage data of the first storage area, for example, a moving image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, and a character image using the storage data of the second storage area. A character image control means for controlling display, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, is provided, and the stored data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data on a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is, for example, a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01. For the first moving image of the above and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, etc. , It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 16-8, for example, when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1, the character image is displayed. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, to change the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-8. The second component may be changed at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. As a result, various character image displays can be easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element is set as the character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", as shown in FIG. 16-8, for example, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the in-character coordinates and the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK and the like. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component is in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changed, and a character image using data related to a common character image is used for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. It may be additionally displayable.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit 91AK100… Microprocessor 91AK131 for effect control… CPU
91AK132 ... VDP
91AK143 ... Video decoder 91AK144 ... Video renderer 91AK146 ... Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11-91AKM14 ... Storage area

Claims (1)

It is a game machine equipped with an image display device capable of displaying a production image.
It is equipped with an image generation means for arranging a three-dimensional object in a virtual space and drawing an image when the three-dimensional object is viewed from a specific viewpoint by perspective projection to generate an effect image.
The image generation means
Performs a predetermined process of associating a predetermined image imitating the effect display area of the image display device with a three-dimensional object arranged in the virtual space.
The three-dimensional object subjected to the predetermined processing is changed, and an image when the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint is drawn by perspective projection to generate an effect image.
further,
An effect execution means that can execute a specific effect that displays a moving image with a character image added,
A first storage area for storing data related to moving images,
A second storage area for storing data related to character images,
A moving image control means for controlling the display of a moving image using the data in the first storage area, and
A character image control means for controlling the display of a character image using the data in the second storage area is provided.
The data in the second storage area includes data relating to a first component and a plurality of character image components including the second component.
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to the moving image.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images